Operating Instructions
User Guide
For safe and correct use, be sure to read "Safety Information" before using the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................................11
Manuals for This Machine...............................................................................................................................12
Important......................................................................................................................................................14
How to Read This Manual...............................................................................................................................15
Symbols........................................................................................................................................................15
Names of Major Items.................................................................................................................................15
Notes............................................................................................................................................................15
About IP Address.........................................................................................................................................16
Laws and Regulations......................................................................................................................................17
Legal Prohibition..........................................................................................................................................17
List of Option.....................................................................................................................................................20
Using Manuals.................................................................................................................................................21
Installing Manuals on Your Computer.......................................................................................................21
Opening Manuals.......................................................................................................................................22
Removing Manuals from Your Computer..................................................................................................23
Feature Highlights............................................................................................................................................24
Using the Machine as a Printer...................................................................................................................24
Using the Machine as a Copier..................................................................................................................26
Using the Machine as a Scanner...............................................................................................................29
Using the Machine as a Fax Machine.......................................................................................................33
Exterior: Front View (Type 2 model)...........................................................................................................36
Exterior: Front View (Type 1 model)...........................................................................................................37
Exterior: Rear View......................................................................................................................................38
Interior...........................................................................................................................................................39
Control Panel................................................................................................................................................39
Installing the Machine......................................................................................................................................43
Where to Put the Machine..........................................................................................................................43
Unpacking....................................................................................................................................................46
1
Turning the Power on...................................................................................................................................55
Initial Setup...................................................................................................................................................58
Changing Operation Modes......................................................................................................................59
Saving Energy..............................................................................................................................................60
Multi-access.................................................................................................................................................61
Connecting the Machine.................................................................................................................................66
Connecting with a Computer Using a USB Cable....................................................................................66
Connecting to a Telephone Line.................................................................................................................67
Configuring the Machine.................................................................................................................................70
Configuring the IPv4 Address Settings.......................................................................................................70
Configuring the IPv6 Address Settings.......................................................................................................72
Configuring the Ethernet Speed..................................................................................................................75
Configuring Telephone Network Settings..................................................................................................76
Sharing the Printer on a Network...................................................................................................................80
Installing Option...............................................................................................................................................81
Installing the Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2).......................................................................................................81
Paper and Other Media..................................................................................................................................84
Supported Paper for Each Tray..................................................................................................................84
Specifications of Paper Types.....................................................................................................................86
Unsupported Types of Paper......................................................................................................................93
Paper Storage Precautions..........................................................................................................................94
Printable Area..............................................................................................................................................94
Loading Paper..................................................................................................................................................96
Loading Paper in Tray 1..............................................................................................................................96
Loading Paper in Tray 2...........................................................................................................................105
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray............................................................................................................108
Loading Envelopes....................................................................................................................................110
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size...................................................................................................113
Placing Originals...........................................................................................................................................117
About Originals.........................................................................................................................................117
Placing Originals.......................................................................................................................................119
Entering Characters.......................................................................................................................................123
2
Restricting Machine Functions According to User.......................................................................................125
Enabling the User Restriction Settings......................................................................................................125
When Machine Functions are Restricted.....................................................................................................129
Windows....................................................................................................................................................131
Mac OS X 10.3.........................................................................................................................................132
Mac OS X 10.4.........................................................................................................................................132
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6..............................................................................................................................132
Accessing the Printer Properties....................................................................................................................134
Accessing the Printer Properties from the [Devices and Printers] Window...........................................134
Accessing the Printer Properties from an Application.............................................................................134
Basic Operation in Printer Mode..................................................................................................................136
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs.....................................................................................................................136
Canceling a Print Job................................................................................................................................137
Storing a Locked Print file.........................................................................................................................139
Printing a Locked Print file.........................................................................................................................140
Deleting a Locked Print file.......................................................................................................................141
Checking which Locked Print File Jobs Have Been Canceled...............................................................142
Manual Duplex Printing (Type 1 model).....................................................................................................145
Using Various Print Functions........................................................................................................................147
Print Quality Functions...............................................................................................................................147
The Screen in Copier Mode.........................................................................................................................151
Canceling a Copy.....................................................................................................................................155
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies.........................................................................................................156
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Side of Paper.....................................................................167
Making 2-sided Copies Manually (Type 1 model)....................................................................................169
Specifying Scan Settings...............................................................................................................................170
3
Adjusting Image Density...........................................................................................................................170
Selecting the Document Type According to Original.............................................................................171
The Screen in Scanner Mode.......................................................................................................................173
Registering Scan Destinations.......................................................................................................................175
Deleting Scan Destinations.......................................................................................................................181
Scanning Using the Control Panel................................................................................................................183
Basic Operation for Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder....................................................................................183
Scanning from a Computer...........................................................................................................................195
The Screen in Fax Mode...............................................................................................................................199
Setting the Date and Time.............................................................................................................................201
Registering Fax Destinations.........................................................................................................................203
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel............................................................................203
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor......................................................................206
Sending a Fax................................................................................................................................................209
Selecting Transmission Mode...................................................................................................................209
Internet Fax Transmission Overview........................................................................................................210
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax.........................................................................................................211
Specifying the Fax Destination.................................................................................................................214
Useful Sending Functions..........................................................................................................................220
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)..................................................................................226
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book.................................................................................................226
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer...........................................................................233
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet........................................................................................................................235
Configuring Transmission Settings............................................................................................................237
Selecting Reception Mode.......................................................................................................................240
4
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory................................................................................................244
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders...............................................................................248
When the Machine Prints a Power Failure Report......................................................................................250
Basic Operation Using the Menu Screen....................................................................................................251
Menu Chart....................................................................................................................................................253
Copy Settings.................................................................................................................................................257
Changing Copy Settings...........................................................................................................................257
Copy Setting Parameters..........................................................................................................................258
Scanner Settings............................................................................................................................................263
Changing Scanner Settings......................................................................................................................263
Scanner Setting Parameters......................................................................................................................264
Fax Transmission Settings..............................................................................................................................267
Changing Fax Transmission Settings........................................................................................................267
Fax Transmission Setting Parameters.......................................................................................................268
Changing Fax Feature Settings................................................................................................................270
Fax Feature Setting Parameters................................................................................................................270
Registering Fax Destinations in Fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial.................................................................277
Fax Address Book Parameters.................................................................................................................277
Changing System Settings........................................................................................................................279
System Setting Parameters........................................................................................................................279
Changing Network Settings.....................................................................................................................287
Network Setting Parameters.....................................................................................................................287
Printing Lists/Reports.....................................................................................................................................291
Types of Lists/Reports...............................................................................................................................291
Reading the Configuration Page..............................................................................................................292
5
Reading the Fax Journal...........................................................................................................................295
Reading the TX/RX Standby File List........................................................................................................296
Administrator Settings....................................................................................................................................298
Changing Administrator Settings..............................................................................................................298
Administrator Setting Parameters.............................................................................................................298
Printer Feature Settings..................................................................................................................................304
Changing Printer Feature Settings............................................................................................................304
Printer Feature Setting Parameters...........................................................................................................304
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................309
Displaying Top Page.....................................................................................................................................311
Changing the Interface Language...........................................................................................................312
Checking the System Information.................................................................................................................313
Checking the Counter Information...........................................................................................................314
Configuring the System Settings...................................................................................................................317
Configuring the Sound Volume................................................................................................................317
Configuring the Paper Settings.................................................................................................................318
Specifying the Size of Paper for Printing Copies....................................................................................320
Configuring the Fax Settings.....................................................................................................................320
Specifying the Priority Tray.......................................................................................................................323
Configuring the Toner Saving Setting......................................................................................................324
Configuring the Shortcut to Function Key Settings..................................................................................325
Registering Destinations................................................................................................................................327
Registering Fax Special Senders..................................................................................................................328
Restricting Machine Functions According to User.......................................................................................329
Configuring the Network Settings................................................................................................................330
Checking the Network Status...................................................................................................................330
Configuring the IPv6 Settings...................................................................................................................331
Configuring the Network Application Settings.......................................................................................332
6
Configuring the DNS Settings..................................................................................................................333
Configuring the Auto E-mail Notification Settings..................................................................................334
Configuring the SNMP Settings...............................................................................................................335
Configuring the SMTP Settings.................................................................................................................337
Configuring the POP3 Settings.................................................................................................................338
Configuring the Internet Fax Settings.......................................................................................................339
Configuring the LDAP Server Settings..........................................................................................................341
Programming/Changing/Deleting the LDAP Server.............................................................................341
Configuring the IPsec Global Settings.....................................................................................................345
Configuring the IPsec Policy.....................................................................................................................346
Printing Lists/Reports.....................................................................................................................................351
Configuring the Administrator Settings.........................................................................................................353
Configuring the Administrator Password and E-mail Address...............................................................353
Resetting the Machine’s Settings..............................................................................................................354
Restoring the Machine's Settings from a Backup File.............................................................................356
Configuring the Date and Time Settings..................................................................................................357
Overview........................................................................................................................................................361
Removing Printing Jams.............................................................................................................................365
Removing Scanning Jams (Type 2 model)..............................................................................................375
Removing Scanning Jams (Type 1 model)..............................................................................................379
Print Quality Problems...................................................................................................................................384
Checking the Condition of the Machine..................................................................................................384
Printer Problems.............................................................................................................................................385
Changing the Printer Driver Settings........................................................................................................386
Print Positions Do Not Match Display Positions......................................................................................387
Adjusting Printing Position.........................................................................................................................387
7
Copier Problems............................................................................................................................................390
Scanner Problems..........................................................................................................................................392
Fax Problems..................................................................................................................................................393
Error and Status Messages on the Screen...................................................................................................399
Replacing the Print Cartridge........................................................................................................................409
Cleaning.........................................................................................................................................................415
Cautions to Take When Cleaning............................................................................................................415
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller...................................................................................416
Cleaning the Exposure Glass...................................................................................................................418
Cleaning the ARDF or ADF.......................................................................................................................419
Moving the Machine.....................................................................................................................................420
Moving over a Long Distance..................................................................................................................421
Disposal..........................................................................................................................................................423
If the Machine is Not Going to Be Used for a Long Time..........................................................................424
Preparing the Machine for a Long Period of Inactivity...........................................................................424
Using the Machine Again After It Has Been Inactive for a Long Period...............................................426
Where to Inquire............................................................................................................................................429
Print Cartridge............................................................................................................................................430
Functions and Network Settings Available in an IPv6 Environment..........................................................431
Available Functions...................................................................................................................................431
Transmission Using IPsec...............................................................................................................................433
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec..................................................................................................433
Security Association..................................................................................................................................434
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow.........................................................................435
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings........................................................................................435
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer.............................................................................................436
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel..........................................................................438
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions.................................................................439
Programming the LDAP Server.................................................................................................................440
8
When LDAP Authentication is Specified..................................................................................................444
Specifying the LDAP Address Search Conditions...................................................................................446
Specifications of the Machine......................................................................................................................449
General Function Specifications..............................................................................................................449
Printer Function Specifications..................................................................................................................451
Copier Function Specifications.................................................................................................................452
Fax Function Specifications......................................................................................................................454
Specifications of Options..............................................................................................................................457
Electromagnetic Interference........................................................................................................................458
Copyright Information about Installed Applications...................................................................................459
JPEG LIBRARY............................................................................................................................................459
OpenLDAP 2.1..........................................................................................................................................459
OpenSSL 0.9.8g.......................................................................................................................................460
Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................463
INDEX...........................................................................................................................................................465
9
10
1. Guide to the Machine
This chapter provides basic information about the product and this manual.
Introduction
This manual contains detailed instructions and notes on the operation and use of this machine. For your
safety and benefit, read this manual carefully before using the machine. Keep this manual in a handy
place for quick reference.
11
1. Guide to the Machine
Manuals for This Machine
Several manuals are provided with this machine. Select the manual that contains the information you
require.
• Media differ according to manual.
• The printed and electronic versions of a manual have the same contents.
®
®
®
• Adobe Acrobat Reader /Adobe Reader must be installed in order to view the manuals as PDF
files.
• A Web browser must be installed in order to view the HTML manuals.
Safety Information
Provides information on safe usage of this machine.
To avoid injury and prevent damage to the machine, be sure to read this.
Quick Installation Guide
Contains procedures for removing the machine from its box and connecting it to a computer.
Initial Guide for Scanner and Fax
Provides installation and operation procedures for the machine's scanner and fax functions. Details
about these functions that are not included in this manual are provided in User Guide.
User Guide
Provides information about general operation and covers the topics listed below.
• Installing options
• Suitable paper types
• Procedures to use the printer, copier, scanner, and fax functions
• Configuring the machine
• Troubleshooting problems and fixing paper jams
• Replacing consumables
• Checking the status of the machine using Web Image Monitor
• Information about maintenance
This manual is stored in the manual CD-ROM supplied with the machine.
Quick Guide
Provides information about troubleshooting and basic operations for making photocopies,
scanning, and sending faxes.
This manual is stored in the manual CD-ROM supplied with the machine.
12
Manuals for This Machine
Driver Installation Guide
Contains procedures for installing the printer drivers (PCL6 and PostScript 3) and scanner driver
(TWAIN).
This manual is stored in the driver CD-ROM supplied with the machine.
13
1. Guide to the Machine
Notice
Important
In no event will the company be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages
as a result of handling or operating the machine.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use of
parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
14
How to Read This Manual
How to Read This Manual
Symbols
This manual uses the following symbols:
Indicates points to pay attention to when using the machine, and explanations of likely causes of paper
misfeeds, damage to originals, or loss of data. Be sure to read these explanations.
Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.
This symbol is located at the end of sections. It indicates where you can find further relevant information.
[ ]
Indicates the names of keys on the machine's display or control panels.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
(mainly North America)
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols. Read the
information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model you are using. For
Names of Major Items
Major items of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual:
• Auto Document Feeder (Auto Reverse Scanning) ARDF
• Auto Document Feeder (1 Side Scanning) ADF
Notes
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your local dealer.
15
Laws and Regulations
Laws and Regulations
Legal Prohibition
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, driver's licenses.
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility for its
completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying or printing
certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
17
1. Guide to the Machine
Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the model type and region of your machine.
This machine comes in two models which vary in what type of auto document feeder (ADF) they are
equipped with: ADF (capable of 1 Side Scanning) or ARDF (capable of Auto Reverse Scanning).
When describing procedures that are model-specific, this manual refers to the different machine models
as Type 1 or Type 2. The following table describes the model types.
Model types
Model type
Model name
SP 3500SF
SP 3510SF
Type of ADF
Type 1
Type 2
ADF
ARDF
Furthermore, there is a label on the right side of the machine, located in the position shown below. The
label contains details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.
CMF003
The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -22, -27
• 220-240V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17
• 120 V
18
Model-Specific Information
• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
19
Using Manuals
Using Manuals
Be sure to read this section before any other part of this manual.
• This manual uses procedures based on Windows 7 as an example, unless otherwise specified.
Procedures and screens might vary depending on the operating system you are using.
Installing Manuals on Your Computer
The manual CD-ROM provided with the machine contains manuals in HTML format and PDF. Follow the
instructions below to install it.
• System requirements for installing the HTML manual:
• Operating system: Windows XP/Vista/7, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008
R2
• Minimum display resolution: 800 × 600 pixels
• Recommended browsers for viewing the HTML manual:
• Internet Explorer 6 or later
• Firefox 3.5 or later
• Safari 4.0 or later
• Applications for viewing the PDF manuals:
• Adobe Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. Quit all applications currently running.
2. Insert the manual CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If you are using a computer running a Macintosh operating system, open “Manuals.htm” from the
CD-ROM root directory.
3. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK].
4. Click [Install manuals].
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.
6. Click [Finish] when the installation is completed.
7. Click [Exit].
21
1. Guide to the Machine
• If you are using a computer running a Windows operating system, the CD-ROM opens
automatically. However, AutoRun may not work under certain operating system settings. If this is
the case, launch “setup.exe” from the CD-ROM root directory.
Opening Manuals
This section describes how to open the manuals. There are three ways to view the manuals.
Opening from the desktop icon
Follow the procedure below to open the manuals from the desktop icon.
1. Double-click the manual icon on your desktop.
The manual opens.
Opening from the [Start] menu
Follow the procedure below to open the manual from the [Start] menu.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to [Product Name], and then click
[Manual Name].
The manual opens.
• The menu options may appear differently, depending on the options chosen during installation.
Opening from the CD-ROM
Follow the procedure below to open the manual from the CD-ROM.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
22
Using Manuals
1. Insert the manual CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
If you are using a computer running a Macintosh operating system, open "Manuals.htm" from the
CD-ROM root directory.
2. Select a language for the interface, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Read HTML manuals] or [Read PDF manuals], and then select the manual you want
to read.
The manual opens.
• If you are using a computer running a Windows operating system, the CD-ROM opens
automatically. However, AutoRun may not work under certain operating system settings. If this is
the case, launch “setup.exe” from the CD-ROM root directory.
Removing Manuals from Your Computer
Follow the procedure below to remove manuals from your computer.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. On the [Start] menu, point to [All Programs], point to [Product Name], and then click
[Uninstall].
2. Follow the instructions to remove the manual.
3. Click [Finish].
• The menu options may appear differently, depending on the options chosen during installation.
23
1. Guide to the Machine
Feature Highlights
This section provides information about basic usage and some useful functions of the machine.
• Certain functions require special machine configuration.
• This machine is compatible with certain other network environments and operating systems in
addition to Windows and Mac OS X. For details, contact your sales or service representative, or
visit the product Web site.
Using the Machine as a Printer
To use this machine as a printer, two types of connection methods are available:
• USB connection
• Network connection
Connecting via USB
You can connect this machine directly to a computer using a USB cable.
CMF004
Preparation for printing via USB
To use this machine as a printer via USB connection:
1. Connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable, and install the printer driver on the
computer.
provided on the driver CD-ROM.
Connecting via a network
You can connect this machine to a network and use it as a network printer.
24
Feature Highlights
CMF005
Preparation for printing via a network
To use this machine as a printer via network connection:
1. Connect the machine to a network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine's IP address.
3. Install the printer driver on a computer.
For details, see the instructions provided on the driver CD-ROM.
Printing confidential documents
If you use the Locked Print function, you can password protect your print job.
This means that your job is printed only after you enter the password using the machine's control panel.
This function prevents unauthorized users seeing sensitive documents at the printer.
• This function is only available when using the PCL6 printer driver, and printing from a computer
running a Windows operating system.
CMF006
25
1. Guide to the Machine
Printing confidential documents
1. Use the printer driver to send a print job as a Locked Print file from a computer.
2. Enter the password using the control panel to print the file.
Using the Machine as a Copier
This section describes some useful functions of this machine when used as a copier.
Making enlarged or reduced copies
This machine has preset ratios for scaling originals, to make it easy to convert documents between
different standard sizes.
CES103
Preparation for making enlarged or reduced copies
To always enlarge or reduce copies:
1. Configure the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting.
To use this function for the current job only:
1. Configure the setting using the [Reduce/Enlarge] key before starting the current job.
Making combined copies and 2-sided copies
You can combine multiple pages (2 or 4 pages) of an original onto a single page. Also, with the Type 2
model, you can scan 2-sided originals and make 2-sided copies.
26
Feature Highlights
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ARDF or ADF, not when it is set on the
exposure glass.
Example of combined copying
Original
Copy
CMF250
Example of 2-sided copying
Original
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CMF261
27
1. Guide to the Machine
You can either set this machine to always make combined/2-sided copies, or use this function only
when necessary.
Preparation for making combined/2-sided copies
To always make combined/2-sided copies:
1. Configure the machine's default [Duplex/Combine] setting.
To use this function for the current job only:
1. Configure the setting by pressing [Dup/Comb] before starting the current job.
• You can make 2-sided copies manually with the Type 1 model.
Copying both sides of an ID card onto one side of paper
You can copy the front and back sides of an ID card, or other small document, onto one side of a sheet
of paper.
• This function is only available when the original is set on the exposure glass, not when it is set in the
ARDF or ADF.
CES165
You can either set this machine to always make photocopies in ID card copy mode, or use this function
only when necessary.
Preparation for copying an ID card
To always make photocopies in ID card copy mode:
1. Configure the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting.
To use this function for the current job only:
28
Feature Highlights
1. Press the [Shortcut to Func.] key (to which the ID card copy mode is assigned) before starting
the current job.
• To use the [Shortcut to Func.] key to set ID card copy mode for the current job, [Shortcut to
Function] under administrator settings must be set to [ID Card Copy Mode].
Sorting the output paper
When making multiple copies of multiple pages, you can configure the machine to sort the output pages
into sets.
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ARDF or ADF, not when it is set on the
exposure glass.
CES104
Preparation for sorting the output paper
1. Enable the [Sort] setting under copy settings.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
There are two scanning methods: scanning from the computer (TWAIN scanning) and scanning using
the control panel.
Scanning from the computer
TWAIN scanning allows you to operate the machine from your computer and scan originals into
your computer directly.
TWAIN scanning can be performed using a TWAIN-compliant application.
TWAIN scanning is available with both USB and network connections.
29
1. Guide to the Machine
Scanning using the control panel
Scanning using the control panel allows you to send scanned files via e-mail (Scan to E-mail), to an
FTP server (Scan to FTP), or to the shared folder of a computer on a network (Scan to Folder), or to
a USB flash disk (Scan to USB).
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder functions are available only through a network
connection. No network connection is required for the Scan to USB function; you can send
scanned files directly to a USB flash disk inserted into the front of the machine.
• The machine supports WIA scanning, an additional method of scanning originals from your
computer, for USB connection. WIA scanning is possible if your computer is running Windows
operating system and a WIA-compatible application. For more information, see the manual for
your application.
Scanning from a computer
You can operate the machine from your computer and scan originals into your computer directly.
CMF007
Preparation for scanning from a computer with USB connection
1. Connect the machine to the computer using a USB cable, and install the scanner driver on the
computer.
provided on the driver CD-ROM.
2. If no TWAIN-compliant application is installed on the computer, install one.
For details, see the manual of the application.
Preparation for scanning from a computer with network connection
1. Connect the machine to the network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine's IP address.
30
Feature Highlights
3. Install the scanner driver on the computer.
For details, see the instructions provided on the driver CD-ROM.
4. If no TWAIN-compliant application is installed on the computer, install one.
For details, see the manual of the application.
• A CD-ROM containing a TWAIN-compliant application (Presto! PageManager) is provided with
the machine. For details, see the manual of Presto! PageManager.
Sending scanned files via e-mail
You can send scanned files via e-mail using the control panel.
CMF008
Preparation for sending scanned files via e-mail
1. Connect the machine to the network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine's IP address.
3. Configure the DNS and SMTP settings using Web Image Monitor.
4. Register the destinations to the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
Sending scanned files to an FTP server
You can send scanned files to an FTP server using the control panel.
31
1. Guide to the Machine
CMF009
Preparation for sending scanned files to an FTP server
1. Connect the machine to the network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine's IP address.
3. Register the destinations to the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
Sending scanned files to a computer's shared folder
You can send scanned files to the shared folder of a computer on a network using the control panel.
CMF010
Preparation for sending scanned files to a computer's shared folder
1. Connect the machine to the network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine's IP address.
3. Create a destination folder on the computer's hard disk drive, and configure it as a shared
folder.
For details, see your operating system's documentation.
32
Feature Highlights
4. Register the destinations to the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
Sending scanned files to a USB flash disk
You can send and store scanned files on a USB flash disk using the control panel.
CMF011
Preparation for sending scanned files to a USB flash disk
1. Insert a USB flash disk in the machine.
Using the Machine as a Fax Machine
This section describes basic procedures for using this machine as a fax machine.
Using as a fax machine
CMF012
Preparation for using as a fax machine
1. Connect the machine to the telephone line.
2. Configure the telephone network settings.
33
1. Guide to the Machine
3. Configure the time and date.
4. Register the destinations to the Address Book using the control panel or Web Image Monitor.
Using the machine with an external telephone
You can use this machine as a fax machine and also use the same telephone line for voice calls.
CMF013
Preparation for using the machine with an external telephone
1. Connect an external telephone to the machine.
2. Select the fax reception mode.
Sending faxes from a computer (LAN-Fax)
You can send a document directly from a computer through this machine to another fax machine,
without printing the document.
• This function is supported by Windows XP/Vista/7, and Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008/2008 R2. Mac OS X does not support this function.
34
Feature Highlights
CMF014
Preparation for sending faxes from a computer connected via USB
1. Connect the machine to a computer using a USB cable.
2. Install the LAN-Fax driver on the computer.
For details, see the instructions provided on the driver CD-ROM.
3. Register LAN-Fax destinations in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
Preparation for sending faxes from a computer connected via network
1. Connect the machine to the network.
2. Specify the network settings, such as the machine’s IP address.
3. Install the LAN-Fax driver on the computer.
For details, see the instructions provided on the driver CD-ROM.
4. Register LAN-Fax destinations in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
35
1. Guide to the Machine
Guide to Components
This section lists the names and functions of the parts of this machine.
Exterior: Front View (Type 2 model)
CMF015
1. ARDF (Auto Reverse Document Feeder) Cover
Open this cover to remove originals jammed in the ARDF.
2. Input Tray for the ARDF
Open the cover and place stacks of originals here. They will feed in automatically. This tray can hold up to 50
sheets of plain paper.
3. Extender for the ARDF output tray
Extend this when placing paper longer than A4 in the input tray for ARDF.
4. Output Tray for the ARDF
Originals scanned with the ARDF are output here.
5. Stop Fences
Raise this fence to prevent paper from falling off.
6. Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the print cartridge or remove jammed paper.
7. Tray 2 (option)
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
36
Guide to Components
8. Tray 1
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
9. Bypass Tray
This tray can hold up to 50 sheets of plain paper.
10. Output Tray
Printed paper is output here. Up to 125 sheets of plain paper can be stacked here.
11. USB Flash Disk Port
Insert a USB flash disk to store scanned files using the Scan to USB function.
12. Control Panel
Contains a screen and keys for machine control.
13. Exposure Glass
Place originals here sheet by sheet.
14. Cover for the Exposure Glass
Open this cover to place originals on the exposure glass.
Exterior: Front View (Type 1 model)
14
1
2 3
4
12
11
10
13
5
6
9
8
7
CMF052
1. ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Cover
Open this cover to remove originals jammed in the ADF.
2. Input Tray for the ADF
Place stacks of originals here. They will feed in automatically. This tray can hold up to 35 sheets of plain
paper.
37
1. Guide to the Machine
3. Output Tray for the ADF
Originals scanned with the ADF are output here.
4. Extender for the ADF Trays
Extend these when placing paper longer than A4 in the input tray for ADF.
5. Stop Fences
Raise this fence to prevent paper from falling off.
6. Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the print cartridge or remove jammed paper.
7. Tray 2 (option)
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
8. Tray 1
This tray can hold up to 250 sheets of plain paper.
9. Bypass Tray
This tray can hold up to 50 sheets of plain paper.
10. Output Tray
Printed paper is output here. Up to 125 sheets of plain paper can be stacked here.
11. USB Flash Disk Port
Insert a USB flash disk to store scanned files using the Scan to USB function.
12. Control Panel
Contains a screen and keys for machine control.
13. Exposure Glass
Place originals here sheet by sheet.
14. Cover for the Exposure Glass
Open this cover to place originals on the exposure glass.
Exterior: Rear View
8
1
7
6
2
3 4
5
CMF016
1. Power Switch
Use this switch to turn the power on or off.
38
Guide to Components
2. Power Socket
For connecting the power cord to the machine.
3. Rear Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper or when printing on envelopes.
4. Tray 1 Rear Cover
Remove this cover when loading paper longer than A4 in tray 1.
5. G3 (analog) Line Interface Connector
For connecting a telephone line.
6. Ethernet Port
For connecting the machine to the network using a network interface cable.
7. USB Port
For connecting the machine to a computer using a USB cable.
8. External Telephone Connector
For connecting an external telephone.
Interior
1
CMF017
1. Print Cartridge
Messages appear on the screen when the print cartridge needs to be replaced, or a new cartridge needs to
be prepared.
• For details about the messages that appear on the screen when consumables need to be replaced,
Control Panel
This section describes the names and usage of the parts of the control panel.
39
1. Guide to the Machine
• The actual control panel may look different from the illustration below, depending on the country of
use.
• If the machine remains turned off for a certain period of time (for example, when the power switch
is turned off or when there is a power failure), all documents stored in memory will be lost. If the
Fax Received indicator is lit or flashing, make sure to print out the stored documents before turning
off the power (for example, prior to relocating the machine).
CMF130
1. Fax Received indicator
Lights up when received faxes that have not been printed out exist in the machine's memory. Flashes when the
machine is unable to print out the faxes due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam.
2. [Pause/Redial] key
• Pause
Press to insert a pause in a fax number. The pause is indicated by “P”.
• Redial
Press to display the last used scan or fax destination.
3. [On Hook Dial] key
Press to use on-hook dialing to check the destination's status when sending a fax.
4. [Address Book] key
Press to select a scan or fax destination from the Address Book.
5. [Image Quality] key
Press to select scan quality for the current job.
• Copier mode: select Text, Photo, or Mixed.
• Scanner mode: select the resolution.
• Fax mode: select Standard, Detail, or Photo.
6. [User Tools] key
Press to display the menu for configuring the machine's system settings.
40
Guide to Components
7. [Copy] key
Press to switch to copier mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in copier mode.
8. [Shortcut to Func.] key
Press to use the function pre-assigned for this key. Depending on the setting, one of the following functions can
be used by one-touch:
• Activate ID card copy mode for the current job
• Enter the [Print Received File] menu under fax feature settings
• Enter the [Immediate TX] menu under fax transmission settings
• Open the scanner Address Book (for Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder)
• Enter the combined/2-sided copy menu for the current job
9. Screen
Displays current status and messages.
10. Scroll keys
Press to move the cursor in the directions indicated by each scroll key.
Pressing the [ ][ ] keys while the machine is in standby mode will display the menu for configuring the settings
of the machine's current operation mode (copier, scanner, or fax).
11. Number keys
Use to enter numerical values when specifying settings such as fax numbers and copy quantities, or enter
letters when specifying names.
12. [Clear/Stop] key
• While the machine is processing a job: press to cancel the current job.
• While configuring the machine: press to cancel the current setting and return to standby mode.
• While in standby mode: press to cancel temporary settings such as image density or resolution.
13. [Start] key
Press to scan, copy, or send a fax.
14. [OK] key
Press to confirm settings or enter the next level of the menu tree.
15. [Escape] key
Press to cancel the last operation or exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
16. Alert indicator
Flashes yellow when the machine will require maintenance soon (such as replacing a print cartridge), or lights
up red when a machine error occurs.
When an alert is issued, check the messages on the screen and follow the instructions as provided in "Error
and Status Messages on the Screen".
17. Selection keys
Press the key that corresponds to an item shown on the bottom line of the screen to select it.
18. Power indicator
Remains lit while the power is on. It is unlit when the power is off.
41
1. Guide to the Machine
19. [Facsimile] key
Press to switch to fax mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in fax mode.
20. [Scanner] key
Press to switch to scanner mode. The key stays lit while the machine is in scanner mode.
21. [Density] key
Press to adjust image density for the current job.
• Copier mode: select from 5 levels of density.
• Scanner mode: select from 5 levels of density.
• Fax mode: select from 3 levels of density.
22. [Reduce/Enlarge] key
• Copier mode: press to specify the reduction or enlargement ratio for the current job.
• Scanner mode: press to specify the scanning size according to the current original.
23. [Shift] key
Press to use the Quick Dial numbers 11 to 20 when specifying a scan or fax destination using the One Touch
buttons.
24. One Touch buttons
Press to select a scan or fax Quick Dial destination.
• The backlight of the screen is turned off when the machine is in Energy Saver mode.
• When the machine is processing a job, you cannot display the menu for configuring the machine.
You can confirm the machine's status by checking messages on the screen. If you see messages
such as "Printing...", "Copying...", or "Processing...", wait until the current job is finished.
• A sticker for the control panel may be included, depending on the country of use. If included, apply
the stickers appropriate for your language to the control panel. Note that if the control panel is
covered with a protective sheet, be sure to remove it before applying the stickers.
• For details about how to configure the [Shortcut to Func.] key, see p.298 "Administrator Settings".
• For details about what to do when the Fax Received indicator is flashing or lit, see p.246 "Printing
42
2. Getting Started
This chapter describes procedures for installing and configuring the machine, connecting options to the
machine, and handling paper.
Installing the Machine
This section describes steps required to install the machine and prepare it for use.
Where to Put the Machine
The machine’s location should be carefully chosen because environmental conditions greatly affect its
performance.
• Do not use flammable sprays or solvents in the vicinity of this machine. Doing so could result in
fire or electric shock.
• Do not place vases, plant pots, cups, toiletries, medicines, small metal objects, or containers
holding water or any other liquids, on or close to this machine. Fire or electric shock could result
from spillage or if such objects or substances fall inside this machine.
• Keep the machine away from humidity and dust. Otherwise a fire or an electric shock might
occur.
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. If it topples over, an injury might
occur.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine to topple over,
possibly resulting in injury.
43
2. Getting Started
• Keep the machine in an area that is within optimum environmental conditions. Operating the
machine in an environment that is outside the recommended ranges of humidity and
temperature can cause an electrical fire hazard. Keep the area around the socket free of dust.
Accumulated dust can become an electrical fire hazard.
• Make sure the room where you are using the machine is well ventilated and spacious. Good
ventilation is especially important when the machine is used heavily.
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so risks fire caused by overheated internal
components.
• Keep the machine away from salt-bearing air and corrosive gases. Also, do not install the
machine in places where chemical reactions are likely (laboratories, etc.), as doing so will
cause the machine to malfunction.
Space Required for Installation
The recommended (minimum) space requirements are as follows:
40 cm
(15.8")
10 cm
(4")
20 cm
(7.9")
20 cm
(7.9")
70 cm
(27.6")
CMF019
Optimum Environmental Conditions
Permissible and recommended temperature and humidity ranges are as follows:
44
Installing the Machine
CER119
• White area: Permissible Range
• Blue area: Recommended Range
To avoid possible build-up of ozone, locate this machine in large well ventilated room that has an
3
air turnover of more than 30m /hr/person.
Environments to Avoid
• Areas exposed to direct sunlight or strong light
• Dusty areas
• Areas with corrosive gases
• Areas that are excessively cold, hot, or humid
• Areas directly exposed to currents of hot, cold, or room-temperature air from air conditioners
• Areas directly exposed to radiant heat from heaters
• Locations near air conditioners, heaters, or humidifiers
• Locations near other electronic equipment
• Locations subject to frequent strong vibration
Ventilation
When you use this machine in a confined space without good ventilation for a long time or print
large quantities, you might detect an odd smell.
This might cause the output paper to also have an odd smell.
When you detect an odd smell, regularly ventilate in order to keep the workplace comfortable.
• Set up the machine so that it does not directly ventilate towards people.
3
• Ventilation should be more than 30 m /hr/person.
New machine smell
When a machine is new, it might have a unique smell. This smell will subside in about one week.
45
2. Getting Started
When you detect an odd smell, sufficiently ventilate and circulate the air in the room.
Power Source
•
•
: 220-240 V, 5 A, 50/60 Hz (when fully equipped)
: 120 V, 10 A, 60 Hz (when fully equipped)
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above.
Unpacking
To protect it from shock and vibration during transit, this machine comes packaged in cushioning foam
and secured with tape. Remove these protective materials after bringing the machine to where it will be
installed.
• Be sure to locate the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet. This will allow easy
disconnection of the power cord in the event of an emergency.
• If the machine emits smoke or odours, or if it behaves unusually, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• If metal objects, or water or other fluids fall inside this machine, you must turn off its power
immediately. After turning off the power, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the
wall outlet. Then contact your service representative and report the problem. Do not use the
machine. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity. Doing so could
result in electric shock.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine away from babies
and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into
contact with the mouth or nose.
46
Installing the Machine
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• Do not use the cleaner to suck spilled toner (including used toner). Sucked toner may cause
firing or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the cleaner. However, it is possible
to use the cleaner designed for dust explosion-proof purpose. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean remainder with wet cloth.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• When moving the machine, use the inset grips on both sides. The machine will break or cause
injury if dropped.
47
2. Getting Started
• Do not look into the lamp. It can damage your eyes.
• During operation, rollers for transporting the paper and originals revolve. A safety device has
been installed so that the machine can be operated safety. But take care not to touch the
machine during operation. Otherwise, an injury might occur.
• Removed tape is dirty. Be careful not to let it touch your hands or clothes.
• Leave the protective materials in place while moving the machine.
• Lower the machine slowly and carefully to prevent trapping your hands.
• Do not grip on the tray area when lifting the machine.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
• Keep uncovered print cartridge away from direct sunlight.
• Do not touch the print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
CMC013
• Do not touch the ID chip on the side of the print cartridge as indicated in the illustration below.
CMC014
1. Remove the plastic bag.
48
Installing the Machine
2. Lift the machine by using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
CMF053
3. Remove the protective materials attached on the machine's exterior.
Be sure to also remove the protective sheet on the control panel.
CMF107
CMF108
The actual machine may come with protective materials attached in different positions. Make sure
to check the machine's exterior for all protective materials, and remove them completely.
49
2. Getting Started
4. Open the ADF cover.
CMF109
5. Gently pull the protective sheet to remove it.
CMF110
6. Close the ADF cover.
CMF111
50
Installing the Machine
7. Remove the protective sheet and materials.
1
3
2
CMF112
8. Open the rear cover, and then peel off the tape on both sides of the machine.
1
2
CMF113
9. Pull out the tapes and remove the protective materials. Doing so will pull up the levers on
both sides.
CMF114
10. Check that the levers have been pulled up to the positions indicated with . If not, pull
them up completely manually.
Leaving the levers lowered or not pulled up completely may affect the print quality, as toner may
be insufficiently fused.
51
2. Getting Started
CMF115
11. Close the rear cover.
CMF076
12. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
CMF020
52
Installing the Machine
13. Remove the protective material attached inside the machine.
1
3
2
CMF060
14. Unpack the print cartridge. Then, place it on a flat surface, and remove the protection
sheet.
CMC019
Shake the print cartridge from side to side five or six times.
CMC020
53
2. Getting Started
15. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
CMF021
16. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
CMF022
17. Carefully pull tray 1, and then pull out with both hands.
CMF023
Place the tray on a flat surface.
54
2. Getting Started
• Do not use any power sources other than those that match the specifications shown in this
manual. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use any frequencies other than those that match the specifications shown. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use multi-socket adaptors. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use extension cords. Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not use power cords that are damaged, broken, or modified. Also, do not use power cords
that have been trapped under heavy objects, pulled hard, or bent severely. Doing so could
result in fire or electric shock.
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• The supplied power cord is for use with this machine only. Do not use it with other appliances.
Doing so could result in fire or electric shock.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• Be sure to push the plug of the power cord fully into the wall outlet. Partially inserted plugs
create an unstable connection that can result in unsafe buildup of heat.
56
Installing the Machine
• If this machine is not going to be used for several days or longer at a time, disconnect its power
cord from the wall outlet.
• When performing maintenance on the machine, always disconnect the power cord from the
wall outlet.
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet before turning the power on.
• Make sure that the power is off when plugging or unplugging the power cord.
• Do not turn off the power switch until initializing is completed. Doing so results in malfunction.
1. Plug in the power cord.
CMF026
2. Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely.
3. Turn the power switch to ” On”.
CMF027
The Power indicator lights up, and then the [Copy] key on the control panel lights up.
57
2. Getting Started
• Depending on the [Function Priority] setting under [Admin. Tools], the [Facsimile] or [Scanner] key
may light up instead of the [Copy] key.
• The machine may make a noise while initializing. This noise does not indicate a malfunction.
• To turn off the power, turn the power switch to “ Off”.
CMF028
Initial Setup
When you turn on the machine for the first time, a menu for configuring the settings described below will
appear on the display. This section describes how to complete the Initial Setup.
•
: The fax number code is required by international law. You cannot legally connect a
fax machine to the telephone system if the fax number code is not programmed. Also, the fax
header code and the date and time of transmission must be included in the header of all pages
faxed to, from, or within the United States.
• Make sure to select the correct code for the country of use. Selecting the wrong country code may
cause failures in fax transmissions.
Display language
The language selected here is used for the display.
User fax number
The number entered here is used as the fax number of the machine. The user fax number can
contain 0 to 9, space, and "+".
User name
The name entered here is used as the name of the fax sender.
58
Installing the Machine
Country code
The country code selected here is used for configuring the time and date display formats, and the
settings related to fax transmissions with appropriate default values for the country of use.
1. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the required language, and then press the [OK] key.
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Number:], and then enter the user fax number (up to 20
digits).
3. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Name:], enter the user name (up to 20 characters), and
then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the required country code, and then press the [OK] key.
• You can change the settings configured during the Initial Setup later under [Admin. Tools]. In
addition, you can set the machine's time and date under [Admin. Tools].
• When the [Print Fax Header] setting under fax transmission settings is turned on, the registered user
fax number, user name, and time and date of transmission appear on the header of every fax you
send.
Changing Operation Modes
You can switch between copier, scanner, and fax modes by pressing the corresponding keys.
Copier mode
Press the [Copy] key to activate copier mode. While in copier mode, the [Copy] key lights up.
CMF131
59
2. Getting Started
Scanner mode
Press the [Scanner] key to activate scanner mode. While in scanner mode, the [Scanner] key lights
up.
CMF132
Fax mode
Press the [Facsimile] key to activate fax mode. While in fax mode, the [Facsimile] key lights up.
CMF133
Function Priority
By default, copy mode is selected when the machine is turned on, or if the preset [System Auto
Reset Timer] time passes with no operation while the initial screen of the current mode is displayed.
You can change the selected mode using [Function Priority] under [Admin. Tools].
Saving Energy
This machine is equipped with the following Energy Saver modes: Energy Saver mode 1 and Energy
Saver mode 2. If the machine has been idle for a certain period of time, the machine automatically
enters Energy Saver mode.
60
Installing the Machine
The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax, or
when the [Copy] or [Start] key is pressed.
Energy Saver mode 1
If [EnergySaverMode 1] under [Admin. Tools] is enabled, the machine enters Energy Saver mode
1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds. When the machine is in Energy Saver mode
1, "Energy Saver Mode 1" appears on the screen. It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver
mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in
Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
Energy Saver mode 2
If [EnergySaverMode 2] under [Admin. Tools] is enabled, the machine enters Energy Saver mode
2 after the period of time specified for this setting is passed. When the machine is in Energy Saver
mode 2, the screen turns off while the Power indicator remains lit. Power consumption is lower in
Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy
Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver mode 1.
• Even if Energy Saver mode 2 is enabled, the machine will not enter Energy Saver mode 2 for two
hours if [Low Humidity Mode] under [System Settings] is enabled. However, the machine will enter
Energy Saver mode 1 as normal (even when Energy Saver mode 1 is not enabled).
Multi-access
This machine can perform multiple jobs using different functions, such as copying and faxing, at the
same time. Performing multiple functions simultaneously is called “Multi-access”.
The following table shows the functions that can be performed simultaneously.
Current job
Job that you want to execute simultaneously
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax memory reception
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)
Copying
• Receiving a print job from a computer (the actual printing starts
after copying is finished)
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
61
2. Getting Started
Current job
Job that you want to execute simultaneously
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax immediate printing
• Fax memory reception
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
Scanning
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax immediate printing
• Fax memory reception
Scanning a fax into the
machine's memory before
transmission
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
Fax immediate transmission
(scanning an original and
sending it simultaneously)
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• Copying
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
Fax memory transmission
(sending a fax that has already
been stored in the machine's
memory)
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
62
Installing the Machine
Current job
Job that you want to execute simultaneously
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax immediate printing
• Fax memory reception
Internet Fax transmission
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
*1
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
Fax immediate printing
(receiving a fax and printing it
simultaneously)
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• Copying
• Scanning
Fax memory reception (storing
a received fax into the
machine's memory)
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
*1
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Fax immediate transmission
• Fax memory transmission
Printing a fax received in the
machine's memory
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
63
2. Getting Started
Current job
Job that you want to execute simultaneously
• Copying (except when printing out the received Internet Fax)
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Fax immediate transmission
• Fax memory transmission
• Fax immediate printing (except when printing out the received
Internet Fax)
Internet Fax reception
• Fax memory reception (except when printing out the received
Internet Fax)
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory (except when
printing out the received Internet Fax)
• Printing (except when printing out the received Internet Fax)
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Fax immediate transmission
• Fax memory transmission
Printing
• Internet Fax transmission
• Internet Fax reception (no printing)
• LAN-Fax transmission
• Copying
• Scanning
• Fax immediate printing
• Fax memory reception
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
• LAN-Fax transmission
Receiving a LAN-Fax job from
a computer
64
Installing the Machine
Current job
Job that you want to execute simultaneously
• Copying
• Scanning
• Scanning a fax into the machine's memory before transmission
• Internet Fax transmission
LAN-Fax transmission
• Printing a fax received in the machine's memory
• Internet Fax reception
• Printing
• Receiving a LAN-Fax job from a computer
Fax printing may take longer than normal if you scan using the control panel at the same time, especially
when scanning multiple pages using the exposure glass.
*1
• If you try to use a function that cannot be performed simultaneously, you will hear a beep sound
from the machine or see a failure message pop up on your computer screen. In this case, try again
after the current job is finished.
65
2. Getting Started
Connecting the Machine
This section describes connecting the machine to a computer and a telephone line.
Connecting with a Computer Using a USB Cable
• USB 2.0 interface cable is not supplied. Obtain a USB cable that is correct for the computer you
are using.
• USB connection with a Macintosh is only possible via the computer’s standard USB port.
1. Connect the square-shaped connector of the USB 2.0 cable to the USB port.
CMF029
2. Connect the opposite end's flat connector to your computer's USB interface or USB hub.
• For details about installing printer drivers for USB connection, see the instructions provided on the
driver CD-ROM.
Connecting with a Network Cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to a computer through a network.
Prepare the hub and other network devices before connecting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable to
the machine's Ethernet port.
• Do not connect the Ethernet port of the machine to a network that may supply excess voltage,
such as a telephone line. Doing so may result in fire or electric shock
66
Connecting the Machine
• The Ethernet cable is not supplied with this machine. Select your cable according to the network
environment.
1. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port.
CMF030
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the network (e.g., a network hub).
• For details about installing printer drivers for network connection, see the instructions provided on
the driver CD-ROM.
Reading the LED lamps
1
2
CMF062
1. Yellow: flashes when 100BASE-TX/RX or 10BASE-TX/RX is being used.
2. Green: comes on when the machine is properly connected to the network.
Connecting to a Telephone Line
You can connect the machine to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) directly or through a
private branch exchange (PBX).
Also, you can connect an external telephone to use the same telephone line for voice calls.
67
2. Getting Started
• To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Pour réduire le risque d'incendie, utiliser uniquement des conducteurs de télécommunications 26
AWG ou de section supérieure.
•
: By law in the United States, you must program your phone number identification (your
fax number) into your machine before you can connect to the public phone system.
• Make sure the connector is the correct type before you start.
1. Connect a telephone line cord to LINE.
CMF032
2. If using an external telephone, connect the telephone to TEL.
CMF033
• After connecting the machine to the telephone line, configure the telephone network settings
and fax reception mode.
68
Connecting the Machine
• If your telephone has functions that are not compatible with this machine, those functions will
not be usable.
• Confirm that you have registered user fax number and user name during Initial Setup. You can
check the registered information in [Program Fax Information] under [Admin. Tools].
69
2. Getting Started
Configuring the Machine
This section describes configuring the settings required to use the machine on a network and as a fax
machine.
Configuring the IPv4 Address Settings
The procedure for configuring network settings differs depending on whether IPv4 address information is
assigned automatically by the network (DHCP), or manually.
Setting the machine to receive an IPv4 address automatically
• A DHCP server is required on the network for the machine to receive an IPv4 address
automatically.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [IPv4 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
8. If you are requested to restart the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
9. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.
The IPv4 address setting will appear under “TCP/IP” on the configuration page.
70
Configuring the Machine
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• If your network environment requires a specific transmission speed that is not automatically
detected, set the transmission speed in [Set Ethernet Speed] under [Network Settings].
• When [DHCP] is activated, manually configured IPv4 address settings are not used.
Assigning the machine's IPv4 address manually
• The IPv4 address assigned to the machine must not be used by any other device on the same
network.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [IPv4 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [IP Address], and then press the [OK] key.
The current IPv4 address is shown.
71
2. Getting Started
8. Enter the machine’s IPv4 address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
Press the [ ] [ ] keys to move between fields.
9. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Subnet Mask], and then press the [OK] key.
The current subnet mask is shown.
10. Enter the subnet mask using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
Press the [ ] [ ] keys to move between fields.
11. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Gateway Address], and then press the [OK] key.
The current gateway address is shown.
12. Enter the gateway address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
Press the [ ] [ ] keys to move between fields.
13. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
14. If you are requested to restart the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
15. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.
The IPv4 address setting will appear under “TCP/IP” on the configuration page.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• If your network environment requires a specific transmission speed that is not automatically
detected, set the transmission speed in [Set Ethernet Speed] under [Network Settings].
• When [DHCP] is activated, manually configured IPv4 address settings are not used.
Configuring the IPv6 Address Settings
The procedure for configuring network settings differs depending on whether IPv6 address information is
assigned automatically by the network (DHCP), or manually.
72
Configuring the Machine
Setting the machine to receive an IPv6 address automatically
• A DHCP server is required on the network for the machine to receive an IPv6 address
automatically.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [IPv6 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Active], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
8. If you are requested to reboot the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
9. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.
The IPv6 address setting will appear under “IPv6 Configuration” on the configuration page.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• When [DHCP] is activated, manually configured IPv6 address settings are not used.
73
2. Getting Started
Assigning the machine's IPv6 address manually
• The IPv6 address assigned to the machine must not be used by any other device on the same
network.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [IPv6 Configuration], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [DHCP], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Manual Config. Address], and then press the [OK] key.
8. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Manual Config. Address], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Enter the machine’s IPv6 address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
10. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Prefix Length], and then press the [OK] key.
11. Enter the prefix length using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
12. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Gateway Address], and then press the [OK] key.
13. Enter the gateway address using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
14. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
15. If you are requested to reboot the machine, turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
16. Print the configuration page to confirm the setting.
The IPv6 address setting will appear under “IPv6 Configuration” on the configuration page.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
74
Configuring the Machine
• When [DHCP] is activated, manually configured IPv6 address settings are not used.
Configuring the Ethernet Speed
You can set the speed that the machine will use for Ethernet communications.
In most cases, this should be left on the default setting, [Auto Select]. This setting allows two interfaces to
automatically determine the optimum speed when they are connected.
• Connection cannot be established if the selected Ethernet speed does not match your network's
transmission speed.
• The use of this feature is recommended. To use it, select [Auto Select].
Machine
Router/HUB
[10Mbps Half [10Mbps Full
[100Mbps
Half Duplex]
[100Mbps
Full Duplex]
[Auto Select]
Duplex]
Duplex]
10 Mbps half
duplex
-
-
-
-
-
-
10 Mbps full
duplex
-
-
-
-
-
100 Mbps
half duplex
-
-
100 Mbps full
duplex
-
auto-
negotiation
(auto
-
-
selection)
75
2. Getting Started
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Ethernet], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Set Ethernet Speed], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the Ethernet speed, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Configuring Telephone Network Settings
Selecting the telephone line type
Select the telephone line type according to your telephone line service. There are two types: tone and
pulse dial.
This function is not available in some regions.
76
Configuring the Machine
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Dial/Push Phone], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the telephone line type appropriate for your telephone
service, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Selecting the telephone network connection type
Select the type of connection to the telephone network.
There are two types: public switched telephone network (PSTN) and private branch exchange (PBX).
77
2. Getting Started
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [PSTN / PBX], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [PSTN] or [PBX], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Setting the outside line access number
If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, set the dial number to access the
outside line.
• Make sure to set the outside line access number that matches the setting of your PBX. Otherwise,
you may not be able to send faxes to outside destinations.
78
Configuring the Machine
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [PBX Access Number], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Enter the outside line access number using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
79
2. Getting Started
Sharing the Printer on a Network
This section describes how to configure this machine as a Windows network printer.
The network printer is configured to enable network clients to use it.
• To change printer properties, you must have Manage Printers permission (Full Control access
authentication under Windows Vista/7). Log on to the file server as an Administrator to acquire this
permission.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
3. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Share this printer].
To share the printer with users using a different version of Windows, follow steps 4 to 7.
Proceed to step 8 if you have installed an alternative driver by selecting [Share this printer] during
the printer driver installation.
4. Click [Additional Drivers...].
5. Select the version of Windows in [Additional Drivers], and then click [OK].
6. Click [Browse...], and select the driver file, and then click [Open].
7. Click [OK].
8. On the [Advanced] tab, click the [Printing Defaults...] button. Specify the default values
for the printer driver that will be distributed to client computers, and then click [OK].
9. Click [Apply].
10. Click [OK].
80
Installing Option
Installing Option
This section describes how to install the optional paper feed unit.
Installing the Paper Feed Unit (Tray 2)
• Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic constitutes a fire and
electric shock hazard.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• Before installing or removing options, always disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall
outlet and allow time for the main unit to fully cool. Failing to take these precautions could result
in burns.
• The machine weighs approximately 18.4 kg (40.6 lb.). When moving the machine, use the
inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly. The machine will break or cause injury if dropped.
• Lifting the paper feed unit carelessly or dropping may cause injury.
• Before moving the machine, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If the cord is
unplugged abruptly, it could become damaged. Damaged plugs or cords can cause an
electrical or fire hazard.
• Tray 1 is required to print using the optional paper feed unit. Without Tray 1, paper jams will occur.
• Do not grip the tray areas when moving the machine.
81
2. Getting Started
1. Check that the package contains paper feed unit.
CMC030
2. Turn off the power, and then unplug the machine's power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Carefully pull the tray, and then pull it out with both hands.
Place the tray on a flat surface.
4. Remove the protective material attached inside the tray.
CMF061
5. Carefully push the tray straight into the optional paper feed unit.
6. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides.
CMF034
82
Installing Option
7. There are three upright pins on the optional paper feed unit. Align them with the holes on
the underside of the machine, and then carefully lower the machine onto them.
CMF035
8. Plug the machine's power cord back into the wall outlet, and then turn on the power.
9. After installing the option, print the configuration page to confirm the installation.
If it is installed properly, "Tray 2" will appear under "Paper Input" on the configuration page.
• After installing the optional paper feed unit, select tray 2 in the printer driver. For details, see the
printer driver Help.
• If the optional paper feed unit is not installed properly, reinstall it following this procedure. If you
cannot install it properly even after attempting reinstallation, contact your sales or service
representative.
83
2. Getting Started
Paper and Other Media
This section describes supported and unsupported paper, paper precautions, details of each paper type
and the printable area.
• All paper must be set vertically, regardless of the paper size.
Supported Paper for Each Tray
This section describes the type, size, and weight of paper that can be loaded in each tray. The capacity
of each paper tray is also provided.
Tray 1
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
2
Thin paper
A4
52 to 162 g/m
250
2
Plain paper
B5 JIS
A5
(13.8 to 43.0 lb.) (80 g/m , 20 lb.)
Thick paper 1, 2
Recycled paper
Color paper
B6 JIS
A6
1
Preprinted paper
Prepunched paper
Letterhead
Legal (8 / " × 14 ")
2
1
Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
1
1
Half Letter (5 / " × 8 / ")
2
2
1
1
Bond paper
Executive (7 / " × 10 / ")
4
2
Cardstock
8 " × 13 "
1
Label paper
8 / " × 13 "
2
1
Folio (8 / " × 13 ")
4
16K (195 × 267 mm)
Custom size:
100 to 216 mm in width,
148 to 356 mm in length
(3.94 to 8.50 inches in width,
5.83 to 14.02 inches in length)
84
Paper and Other Media
Tray 2 (option)
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
2
Thin paper
A4
60 to 105 g/m
250
2
Plain paper
B5 JIS
A5
(16.0 to 28.0 lb.) (80 g/m , 20 lb.)
Thick paper 1
Recycled paper
Color paper
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 ")
2
1
Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
1
1
Preprinted paper
Prepunched paper
Letterhead
Half Letter (5 / " × 8 / ")
2
2
Bypass tray
Type
Size
Weight
Capacity
2
Thin paper
A4
52 to 162 g/m
50
2
Plain paper
B5 JIS
A5
(13.8 to 43.0 lb.) (80 g/m , 20 lb.)
Thick paper 1, 2
Recycled paper
Color paper
Preprinted Paper
Prepunched paper
Letterhead
B6 JIS
A6
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 ")
2
1
Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
1
1
Half Letter (5 / " × 8 / ")
2
2
1
1
Bond paper
Executive (7 / " × 10 / ")
4
2
Cardstock
16K (195 mm × 267 mm)
1
1
Label paper
Com 10 (4 / " × 9 / ")
8
2
7
1
OHP transparencies
Envelope
Monarch (3 / " × 7 / ")
8
2
C5 Env (162 × 229 mm)
C6 Env (114 × 162 mm)
DL Env (110 × 220 mm)
Custom size:
90 to 216 mm in width,
140 to 356 mm in length
(3.54 to 8.50 inches in width,
5.51 to 14.02 inches in length)
85
2. Getting Started
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute may become lower than normal when
printing on Legal size paper.
• If you print with the resolution set at 1200 × 1200 dpi, the following conditions apply:
• Available paper tray: tray 1 and bypass tray
1
• Available paper size: A4, B5 JIS, or Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
• Available paper type: plain paper
• Duplex printing: not available
Specifications of Paper Types
The following tables describe the types of paper that can be used with this machine.
• Depending on the paper type, the toner may take a while to dry. Before handling, make sure
printed sheets have fully dried. Otherwise, the toner may smudge.
• Print quality can be guaranteed only if recommended paper is used. For more information about
recommended paper, contact your sales or service representative.
Thin paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
52 to 64 g/m (13.8 to 17.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
2
Notes
Tray 2 only supports paper weighing 60 to 64 g/m (16.0 to 17.0 lb.).
Plain paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
65 to 99 g/m (17.1 to 26.5 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
86
Paper and Other Media
Thick paper 1
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
100 to 130 g/m (26.6 to 34.6 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
2
Notes
• Tray 2 only supports thick paper weighing 100 to 105 g/m (26.6 to
28.0 lb).
• Duplex printing is only possible with thick paper weighing 100 to 105
2
g/m (26.6 to 28.0 lb).
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of plain paper.
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute may become
lower than normal when printing on paper of the following sizes: A4,
1
1
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 "), 8 " × 13 ", 8 / " × 13 ",
2
2
2
1
Folio (8 / " × 13 "), or 16K (195 × 267 mm).
4
Thick paper 2
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
131 to 162 g/m (34.7 to 43.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size None
Notes • The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of plain paper.
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute may become
lower than normal when printing on paper of the following sizes: A4,
1
1
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 "), 8 " × 13 ", 8 / " × 13 ",
2
2
2
1
Folio (8 / " × 13 "), or 16K (195 × 267 mm).
4
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, prints may be
output with strong curls.
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, take prints from
the output tray frequently.
87
2. Getting Started
Recycled paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m (20.0 to 24.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Color paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m (20.0 to 24.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Preprinted paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m (20.0 to 24.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and tray 2
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Prepunched paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
75 to 90 g/m (20.0 to 24.0 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
88
Paper and Other Media
Item
Description
Notes
If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Thin Paper],
[Thick Paper 1], or [Thick Paper 2].
Letterhead
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
100 to 130 g/m (26.6 to 34.6 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Any input tray can be used.
1
1
Duplex supported size A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
2
Notes
• Tray 2 only supports letterhead weighing 100 to 105 g/m (26.6 to
28.0 lb).
• Paper that has a thickness outside the specified range cannot be
printed onto.
Bond paper
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
105 to 160 g/m (28.0 to 42.6 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size None
Notes
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of plain paper.
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, prints may be
output with strong curls.
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, take prints from
the output tray frequently.
• If the paper thickness is outside the specified range, select [Plain
Paper] or [Thick Paper 1].
Cardstock
Item
Description
2
Paper thickness
105 to 160 g/m (28.0 to 42.6 lb.)
Supported paper tray
Tray 1 and bypass tray
89
2. Getting Started
Item
Description
Duplex supported size None
Notes
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of plain paper.
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, prints may be
output with strong curls.
2
• When using 135 g/m (35.9 lb.) or heavier paper, take prints from
the output tray frequently.
2
• Paper thicker than 160 g/m cannot be printed onto.
Label paper
Item
Supported paper tray
Description
Tray 1 and bypass tray
Duplex supported size None
Notes
• The number of sheets that can be printed in one minute is
approximately half that of plain paper.
• Avoid using adhesive label paper on which glue is exposed. Glue
may stick to the inner parts of the machine, which can cause paper
feed problems, deterioration in print quality, or premature wear of the
print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
OHP transparencies
Item
Description
Supported paper tray
Bypass tray
Duplex supported size None
90
Paper and Other Media
Item
Description
Notes
• When loading OHP transparencies, take care not to load them upside
down. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
• It is recommended to place one sheet at a time.
• Make sure to fan OHP transparencies every time before printing.
Leaving OHP transparencies loaded in the bypass tray may cause
them to stick together and result in a misfeed.
• If multiple OHP transparencies are fed at the same time, load them
one by one.
• When printing on OHP transparencies, remove the transparencies one
by one as they are output.
• When printing on OHP transparencies that have a print side, load
them with the print side over on the bypass tray. Not taking this
precaution may cause them to stick to the fusing unit and cause
misfeeds.
Envelope
Item
Supported paper tray
Description
Bypass tray
Duplex supported size None
Notes
• The number of envelopes that can be printed in one minute is approximately half that of plain
paper.
• Paper can be loaded only up to the lower of the two paper limit marks of the tray.
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction. Also,
configure the printer driver to rotate the print object 180 degrees. For details about changing the
loading orientation, see the printer driver Help.
• Environmental factors can degrade the print quality on both recommended and non-recommended
envelopes.
• If envelopes are severely curled after printing, flatten them by bending them back against the curl.
• After printing, envelopes sometimes have creases along their long edges and toner smear on their
unprinted sides. Their print images might also be blurred. When printing large, black-solid areas,
striping can occur as a result of the envelopes overlapping.
• To correctly specify the length of an envelope whose flap opens along its short edge, be sure to
include the open flap when measuring.
91
2. Getting Started
CMC039
• Fan envelopes, and then align their edges before loading.
CMC040
• When fanning envelopes, make sure they are not stuck together. If they are stuck together,
separate them.
• When fanning envelopes, make sure the envelope flaps are not stuck together. If they are stuck
together, separate them.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten them out so that their curl does not exceed that shown in the
illustration below.
5 mm
0 mm
CMC041
• If the curl is severe, flatten out the envelopes using your fingers, as shown in the illustration below.
92
Paper and Other Media
CMC042
Unsupported Types of Paper
Avoid using the following paper as they are not supported by this machine.
• Paper meant for an ink-jet printer
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Curled or twisted paper
• Torn paper
• Wrinkled paper
• Damp paper
• Dirty or damaged paper
• Paper that is dry enough to emit static electricity
• Paper that has already been printed onto, except a preprinted letterhead.
Malfunctions are especially likely when using paper printed on by other than a laser printer (e.g.
monochrome and color copiers, ink-jet printers, etc.)
• Special paper, such as thermal paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper and conductive paper
• Paper that is heavier or lighter than the specified limitations
• Paper with windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
• Adhesive label paper on which the adhesive under-layer or base paper is exposed
• Paper with clips or staples
• Do not use ink-jet printer paper because it may stick to the fusing unit and cause a paper jam.
• Do not use paper that has already been printed onto by other printers.
• When loading paper, take care not to touch the surface of the paper.
• Even supported types of paper may cause paper jams or malfunctions if the paper is not in good
condition.
93
2. Getting Started
Paper Storage Precautions
Paper should always be stored properly. Improperly stored paper might result in poor print quality,
paper jams, or printer damage.
Recommendations are as follows:
• Avoid storing paper in areas that are excessively cold, hot, humid, or dry.
• Avoid exposing paper to direct sunlight.
• Store on a flat surface.
• Keep paper in its original packaging.
Printable Area
The following diagrams show the areas of paper that the machine can print onto.
Be sure to set the print margins correctly using the settings of the application in which it was created.
Paper
2
4
4
3
1
3
CMC043
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approximately 4.2 mm (0.17 inches)
4. Approximately 4.2 mm (0.17 inches)
94
Paper and Other Media
Envelope
3
3
1
2
4
4
CMC044
1. Print area
2. Feed direction
3. Approximately 10 mm (0.39 inches)
4. Approximately 15 mm (0.59 inches)
• The print area may vary depending on the paper size, printer language and printer driver settings.
• For better envelope printing, we recommend you set the right, left, top, and bottom print margins to
at least 15 mm (0.59 inches) each.
95
2. Getting Started
Loading Paper
This describes how to load paper into the paper tray and bypass tray.
• Do not pull out the paper tray forcefully. If you do, the tray might fall and cause an injury.
• When loading paper, take care not to trap or injure your fingers.
Loading Paper in Tray 1
The following example explains loading procedure for the standard paper tray (Tray 1).
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Make sure paper is not stacked above the limit mark inside the tray. Misfeeds might occur.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• Do not move the side paper guides forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• Do not move the end paper guide forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• When inserting the tray, make sure it is not slanted. Inserting it at a slant can damage the machine.
• Curled paper may jam. Straighten curled paper before loading.
1. Pull out tray 1 carefully with both hands.
CMF036
96
Loading Paper
Place the tray on a flat surface.
2. Pinch the clip on the side paper guide and slide it to match the standard size.
CMC046
CMC047
When loading custom size paper, position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper
size.
3. Pinch the end paper guide and slide it inward to match the standard size.
CMC048
97
2. Getting Started
CMC049
When loading custom size paper, position the paper guide slightly wider than the actual paper
size.
4. Load the new paper stack print side down.
Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.
CMC050
Slide the guides inward, until they are flush against the paper's sides.
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides.
CMC051
98
Loading Paper
5. Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guides; both side and end
paper guides.
CMC052
If there is a gap between the paper and the end paper guide, as in the example below, the paper
might not feed in correctly.
CMC058
6. Carefully push tray 1 straight into the machine.
CMF037
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.
• The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how
much paper is remaining.
99
2. Getting Started
Loading paper longer than A4
This section explains how to load paper longer than A4 (297 mm) into the machine.
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Make sure paper is not stacked above the limit mark inside the tray. Misfeeds might occur.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• Do not move the side paper guides forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• Do not move the end paper guide forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• When inserting the tray, make sure it is not slanted. Inserting it at a slant can damage the machine.
1. Remove the tray 1 rear cover by pushing its center.
CMF038
100
Loading Paper
2. Pull out tray 1 carefully with both hands.
CMF036
Place the tray on a flat surface.
3. Release the extender locks on both sides of the tray, and then pull out the extender until it
clicks.
Make sure the extender's inner surface and the scale are aligned.
CMC057
4. Lock the extender in the extended position.
CMC055
101
2. Getting Started
5. Pinch the clip on the side paper guide, and then slide it to match the paper size.
CMC059
CMC047
6. Pinch the end paper guide and slide it inward to match the paper size.
CMC060
102
Loading Paper
CMC049
7. Load the new paper stack print side down.
Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.
CMC069
Slide the guides inward until they are flush against the paper's sides.
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides.
CMC051
103
2. Getting Started
8. Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guides; both side and end
paper guides.
CMC062
If there is a gap between the paper and the end paper guide, as in the example below, the paper
might not feed in correctly.
CMC063
9. Carefully push tray 1 straight into the machine.
CMF037
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.
• To reinsert the extender, you might have to push it with moderate force.
• The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how
much paper is remaining.
104
Loading Paper
Loading Paper in Tray 2
The following example explains the loading procedure for tray 2.
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Make sure paper is not stacked above the limit mark inside the tray. Misfeeds might occur.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
• Do not mix different types of paper in the same paper tray.
• Do not move the side paper guides forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• Do not move the end paper guide forcefully. Doing so can damage the tray.
• When inserting the tray, make sure it is not slanted. Inserting it at a slant can damage the machine.
1. Pull out tray 2 carefully with both hands.
CMF039
Place the tray on a flat surface.
105
2. Getting Started
2. Pinch the clips on the side paper guide, and then adjust the guide to the paper size.
CMC066
3. Pinch the clip on the end paper guide, and slide it inward to match the paper size.
CMC067
CMC068
4. Load the new paper stack print side down.
Make sure paper is not stacked higher than the upper limit marked inside the tray.
106
Loading Paper
CMC069
Make sure the paper is not stacked higher than the projection on the side paper guides.
CMC070
5. Check there are no gaps between the paper and the paper guide; both side and end
paper guides.
CMC071
107
2. Getting Started
6. Carefully push tray 2 straight into the machine.
CMF040
To avoid paper jams, make sure the tray is securely inserted.
• The remaining paper indicator on the left front side of the paper tray shows approximately how
much paper is remaining.
Loading Paper in the Bypass Tray
• Before printing on paper other than envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers on the machine rear,
inside the rear cover. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• Make sure paper is not stacked above the paper guides inside the bypass tray.
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to avoid
printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically..
• If paper is curled, straighten it before loading, by bending the paper in the opposite direction to the
curl, for example.
• Do not load paper while the machine is printing.
108
Loading Paper
1. Open the bypass tray.
CMF041
If you load A4 (297 mm) or larger size paper, pull out the bypass tray extension.
CMF042
2. Slide the side guides outward, then load paper with the print side up, and push in until it
stops against the machine.
CMF043
109
2. Getting Started
3. Adjust the side guides to the paper width.
CMF044
• After loading paper in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel. Also,
specify the printer driver's paper setting accordingly before printing.
Loading Envelopes
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Before printing on envelopes, make sure to lower the levers on the machine rear, inside the rear
cover, to avoid envelopes coming out creased. Also, pull up the levers back to their original
positions after printing. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing
on paper other than envelopes.
• Avoid using self-adhesive envelopes. They may cause machine malfunctions.
• Check there is no air in the envelopes before loading.
• Envelopes whose flaps are open must be printed with the flaps open, and envelopes whose flaps
are closed must be printed with the flaps closed.
• Load only one size and type of envelope at a time.
• Before loading envelopes, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the machine) by running
a pencil or ruler across them.
110
Loading Paper
• Some kinds of envelope might cause misfeeds, wrinkles or print poorly.
• Print quality on envelopes may be uneven if parts of an envelope have different thicknesses. Print
one or two envelopes to check print quality.
• In a hot and humid environment, the envelope might be output creased or improper printing
quality.
• After loading envelopes in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel to
avoid printing problems. This machine does not detect the paper size automatically.
1. Open the bypass tray.
CMF041
2. Slide the side guides outward, then load envelopes with the print side up, and push in
until it stops against the machine.
Envelopes whose flaps are open must be printed with the flaps open, and envelopes whose flaps
are closed must be printed with the flaps closed. Before loading envelopes, make sure they are as
flat as possible.
CMF045
111
2. Getting Started
3. Adjust the side guides to the envelope width.
CMF046
4. Open the rear cover.
CMF095
5. Lower the levers for printing envelopes on both sides to the position indicated with an
envelope mark.
CMF047
Make sure to pull up the levers back to their original positions after printing.
112
Loading Paper
6. Close the rear cover.
CMF076
• After loading envelopes in the tray, specify the paper type and size using the control panel. Also,
specify the printer driver's paper setting accordingly before printing.
• Be sure to load envelopes so that their flaps are on the left. If you do not, the envelopes will
become creased.
• If printed envelopes come out badly creased, load the envelopes in the opposite direction, and
then rotate the print object by 180 degrees using the printer driver before printing. For details, see
the printer driver Help.
Specifying Paper Type and Paper Size
This section describes how to specify the paper size and paper type using the control panel.
• Paper type and size can also be specified using the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
• For prints from the bypass tray, you can select to print according to either the printer driver settings
or the control panel settings with [Bypass Tray Priority] under system settings.
• If [Auto Continue] under system settings is enabled, printing stops temporarily if a paper type/size
error is detected. The printing restarts automatically with the settings made with the control panel
after about ten seconds.
113
2. Getting Started
Specifying the paper type
This section describes how to specify the paper type.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [System Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the paper type setting for the desired tray, and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the desired paper type, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Specifying the standard paper size
This section describes how to specify the standard paper size.
114
Loading Paper
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [System Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] keys to select the desired paper size, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Specifying a custom paper size
This section describes how to specify a custom paper size.
• Custom size paper cannot be loaded in tray 2.
• When you perform printing, make sure that the paper size specified with the printer driver matches
the paper size specified with the control panel. If a paper size mismatch occurs, a message
appears on the display. To ignore the error and print using mismatched paper, see "If a Paper
Mismatch Occurs".
115
2. Getting Started
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [System Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Tray Paper Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the paper size setting for the desired tray, and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] keys to select [Custom Size], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.
7. Enter the width using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
8. Enter the length using number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
116
Placing Originals
Placing Originals
This section describes the types of originals you can set and how to place them.
About Originals
This section describes the types of originals that can be placed and the parts of the original that are
unscannable.
Recommended size of originals
This section describes the recommended size of the original.
Exposure glass
Up to 216 mm (8.5") in width, up to 297 mm (11.7") in length
ARDF/ADF
1
1
1
• Paper size: 140 to 216 mm (5 / " to 8 / ") in width, 140 to 356 mm (5 / " to 14") in
2
2
2
length
2
• Paper weight: 52 to 105 g/m (13.8 to 28.0 lb.)
• Only 1 sheet of an original can be placed on the exposure glass at a time.
• In the ARDF or ADF, up to 50 sheets or 35 sheets of originals can be placed at once, respectively
2
(when using paper weighing 80 g/m , 20 lb.).
Types of originals not supported by the ARDF or ADF
If placed in the ARDF or ADF, the following types of original might be damaged or become jammed, or
result in gray or black lines appearing on prints:
• Originals larger or heavier than recommended
• Stapled or clipped originals
• Perforated or torn originals
• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
117
2. Getting Started
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin, highly flexible originals
• Thick originals such as postcards
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals that are wet with toner or white out
Unscannable image area
Even if you correctly place originals in the ARDF or ADF or on the exposure glass, margins of a few
millimeters on all four sides of the original might not be scanned.
CES107
Margins when using exposure glass
In copier mode
4 mm
In scanner mode
0 mm
In fax mode
Top
1 mm
1 mm
1 mm
2 mm
Right
Left
3 mm
3 mm
4 mm
0 mm
0 mm
0 mm
Bottom
Margins when using ARDF or ADF
In copier mode
4 mm
3 mm
In scanner mode
In fax mode
Top
0 mm
0 mm
0 mm
1 mm
Right
118
Placing Originals
In copier mode
3 mm
4 mm
In scanner mode
0 mm
0 mm
In fax mode
Left
1 mm
2 mm
Bottom
Placing Originals
This section describes the procedure for placing originals on the exposure glass and in the ARDF or ADF.
• Do not place originals before any correction fluid and toner has completely dried. Doing so may
make marks on the exposure glass that will appear on copies.
• The original in the ARDF or ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you
place originals both in the ARDF/ADF and on the exposure glass.
• Because colors made by marker or highlighter pen on originals are difficult to reproduce, they
might not appear on copies.
Placing originals on the exposure glass
The exposure glass enables you to scan and send documents that cannot be fed into the ARDF or ADF.
• Do not lift the ARDF or ADF forcefully. Otherwise, the cover of the ARDF or ADF might open or be
damaged.
1. Lift the ARDF or ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ARDF or ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Place the original face down on the exposure glass. The original should be aligned to the
rear left corner.
CMF048
119
2. Getting Started
3. Lower the ARDF or ADF.
Hold down the ARDF or ADF with your hands when using thick, folded, or bound originals and the
ARDF or ADF cannot be lowered completely.
Placing originals in the ARDF (Type 2 model)
By using the ARDF, you can scan multiple pages at once. Also, you can scan both sides of original with
the ARDF.
• Do not place different size originals in the ARDF at once.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ARDF.
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the pages of your original before placing
them in the ARDF.
• Place the original squarely.
1. Open the cover of the ARDF.
CMF049
2. Adjust the guides according to the size of the original.
CMF050
120
Placing Originals
3. Place the aligned originals face up in the ARDF. The last page should be on the bottom.
CMF051
• When placing originals longer than A4, pull out the ARDF output tray's extender.
Placing originals in the ADF (Type 1 model)
By using the ADF, you can scan multiple pages at once.
• Do not place different size originals in the ADF at once.
• Straighten curls in the originals before placing them in the ADF.
• To prevent multiple sheets from being fed at once, fan the pages of your original before placing
them in the ADF.
• Place the original squarely.
1. Adjust the guides according to the size of the original.
CMF063
121
2. Getting Started
2. Place the aligned originals face up in the ADF. The last page should be on the bottom.
CMF064
• When placing originals longer than A4, pull out the ADF tray's extenders.
122
Entering Characters
Entering Characters
This section describes how to enter characters using the control panel when configuring the machine's
settings.
Use the keys as follows to enter characters.
To enter a digit
Press a number key.
To delete a character
Press the [ ] key.
To enter a fax number
• To enter a number
Use the number keys.
• To enter characters other than digits
"
"
": Press [ ].
": Press [ ].
" ": Press [ ].
Pause: Press the [Pause/Redial] key. "P" appears on the screen.
Space: Press the [ ] key.
To enter a name
Letters, numbers, and symbols can be entered using the number keys.
To enter two characters that use the same number key successively, wait briefly after entering the
first character.
CMF106
123
2. Getting Started
• Characters you can enter depend on the setting you are configuring.
• If the number you entered is too large or too small for the setting, it will not be accepted. If you
press the [OK] key, the machine will increase or decrease the number to the minimum or maximum
value for the setting.
124
Restricting Machine Functions According to User
Restricting Machine Functions According to
User
You can set the machine to require a user code when someone tries to use certain machine functions.
• When print jobs are restricted, you can only authenticate through the PCL6 printer driver. Printing
from the PostScript 3 printer driver will not be possible.
• User restriction settings can be used in combination with LDAP authentication, except for printing
using the PCL6 printer driver and sending LAN-Faxes. Under LDAP authentication, users will only
be able to authenticate for PCL6 printing and LAN-Faxes using user names and passwords for the
LDAP server, not user codes for the user restriction settings.
Use of the following functions can be restricted:
• Copying
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
• Printing
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
To enable this setting, you must first configure the machine via Web Image Monitor.
Enabling the User Restriction Settings
This section describes how to set the machine to permit only authorized users to use certain machine
functions.
Using Web Image Monitor, enable user restriction for all or some of the functions listed below, and then
register users who can use those functions.
• Copying
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
• Printing
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
125
2. Getting Started
For each user, you can specify which functions are available upon authentication. A maximum of 30
users can be registered.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
5. Under "Available Functions", enter the timeout value in seconds (5 to 60, the default is
30) in [User Authentication Timeout (Copy)].
Within the time specified here, user stays authenticated after paper is output when copying with the
exposure glass. Note that authentication for other functions will expire immediately after using that
function.
6. Select [Restrict] for the functions you want to restrict, and then click [Apply].
Select [Do not Restrict] for the functions you do not want to restrict.
The user restriction setting is enabled for the selected function. Proceed to the following steps to
register users.
7. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
126
Restricting Machine Functions According to User
8. Select a user entry, and then click [Change].
9. Type a unique user name in [User Name] using up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
10. Type a unique user code in [User Code] using up to 8 digits.
The user code will be used to authenticate users when they try to use a restricted function.
11. Select the functions you want to make available for the user upon authentication.
Unselected functions will be unavailable to users authenticated under this user code.
12. Click [Apply].
13. Close the Web browser.
• You must enter both a user name and user code to register a user entry.
• No two user entries can have the same user name or user code.
• Under "Available Functions per User", you will see counter information for prints made by the
copier and printer functions on a user basis.
• The counter resets to 0 in the following cases:
• When you select a user and click [Clear Counter (Copy)] or [Clear Counter (Printer)]
• When the user code is changed (not the user name)
• When the setting is cleared with [Reset Settings of Available Functions] under [Administrator
Tools].
• For details about [Reset Settings of Available Functions], see p.353 "Configuring the Administrator
Modifying user entries
This section describes how to modify user entries.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
127
2. Getting Started
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
6. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
7. Modify settings as necessary.
8. Click [Apply].
9. Close the Web browser.
Deleting user entries
This section describes how to delete user entries.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Restrict Available Functions].
3. Enter the administrator password if required.
4. Click [Apply].
5. Click [Available Functions per User].
A list of currently registered user entries appears.
6. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
7. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
8. Click [Apply].
9. Close the Web browser.
128
When Machine Functions are Restricted
When Machine Functions are Restricted
When a machine function is restricted, only authorized users are able to use that function.
Depending on the restricted function, users will be authenticated from the machine's control panel or in
the printer/LAN-Fax driver.
• When print jobs are restricted, you can only authenticate through the PCL6 printer driver. Printing
from the PostScript 3 printer driver will not be possible.
• User restriction settings can be used in combination with LDAP authentication, except for printing
using the PCL6 printer driver and sending LAN-Faxes. Under LDAP authentication, users will only
be able to authenticate for PCL6 printing and LAN-Faxes using user names and passwords for the
LDAP server, not user codes for the user restriction settings.
The table below shows the functions that can be restricted, and how users can be authenticated to use
those functions.
Restricted function
• Copying
Authentication method
The machine requests for a user code when a user presses the
[Start] key.
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
The user must enter a valid user code from the control panel.
• Printing
The user must enter a valid user code in the printer or LAN-Fax
driver before executing a print command.
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
Authenticating through the control panel
1. When the machine requests for a user code, enter a user code (within 30 seconds) using
the number keys.
If you enter a wrong user code 3 times, the machine beeps and denies the authentication.
2. Press the [OK] key.
Authenticating through the printer or LAN-Fax driver
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. Open the printer driver's properties.
3. Click the [Valid Access] tab (PCL6 printer driver) or check the [User Code] check box.
(LAN-Fax driver).
4. Type the user code using 1 to 8 digits, and then click [OK].
129
2. Getting Started
5. Execute a print command.
If an incorrect user code is entered, the job will be canceled automatically.
• You cannot enter the user code if the [User Authentication] (PCL6 printer driver) or [User
authentication] (LAN-Fax driver) check box on the [Advanced Options] tab of the driver's
properties is checked. Clear the check box if necessary.
130
3. Using the Printer Function
This chapter describes the printer functions.
Configuring Option and Paper Settings
Configure the printer driver according to the machine's option and paper settings.
• Manage Printers permission is required to change the printer properties. Log on as an
Administrators group member to acquire this permission.
• We recommend that bidirectional communication between the machine and the computer be
enabled whenever possible. Bidirectional communication allows the computer to retrieve the
machine's paper settings, current status, and other information.
Conditions for Bidirectional Communication
To establish bidirectional communication, the following conditions must be met:
• Operating system of the computer: Windows XP/Vista/7, and Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008/2008 R2
• When connected via a network
The machine is connected via a standard TCP/IP port, and the default port name must not be
changed.
[Enable bidirectional support] in the [Ports] tab of the printer properties is selected.
• When connected via USB
The machine is connected to the computer's USB port using a USB interface.
[Enable bidirectional support] in the [Ports] tab of the printer properties is selected.
Windows
The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Accessories] tab.
4. Click [Update Now].
If bidirectional communication is not established, select the installed option manually.
5. Click the [Paper Size Settings] tab.
131
3. Using the Printer Function
6. Select the tray you want to use under [Input Tray:], select the paper size under [Paper
Size:], and then click [Update Now].
If bidirectional communication is not established, select the tray and paper size manually.
7. Click [OK] to close the printer properties dialog box.
Mac OS X 10.3
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences…].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Click the [Set Up Printers…].
4. Select the machine from "Printer List", and then click [Show Info].
5. In the [Printer Info] dialog box, select [Installable Options] from the list.
6. Check the tray 2 configuration, and then click [Apply Changes].
7. Click the close button at the upper left corner to close the [Printer Info] dialog box.
8. Click the close button at the upper left corner to close the [Printer List] dialog box.
9. From the [System Preferences] menu, click [Quit System Preferences].
Mac OS X 10.4
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences…].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Select the machine from "Printer", and then click [Printer Setup...].
4. In the [Printer Info] dialog box, select [Installable Options] from the list.
5. Check the tray 2 configuration, and then click [Apply Changes].
6. Click the close button at the upper left corner to close the [Printer Info] dialog box.
7. From the [System Preferences] menu, click [Quit System Preferences].
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences…].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Select the machine from "Printers", and then click [Options & Supplies...].
4. Click the [Driver] tab.
5. Check the tray 2 configuration, and then click [OK].
132
Configuring Option and Paper Settings
6. From the [System Preferences] menu, click [Quit System Preferences].
133
3. Using the Printer Function
Accessing the Printer Properties
This section describes accessing the printer properties. For details about settings, see the printer driver
Help.
Accessing the Printer Properties from the [Devices and Printers] Window
• To change the printer default settings including option configuration settings, log on using an
account that has Manage Printers permission. Members of the Administrators group have Manage
Printers permission by default.
• You cannot change the printer default settings for each user. Settings configured in the printer
properties dialog box are applied to all users. Procedures and screens might vary depending on
the operating system you are using.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
The printer properties dialog box appears.
• The settings you configure here are used as the default settings for all applications.
• When accessing the PostScript3 printer properties, do not change settings for [Form to Tray
Assignment].
Accessing the Printer Properties from an Application
Windows
You can configure printer settings for a specific application.
To configure printer settings for a specific application, open the printer's properties in that application.
The following procedure explains how to configure settings for the WordPad application provided with
Windows 7.
1. Open the file you want to print.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
The [Print] dialog box appears.
134
Accessing the Printer Properties
3. Select the printer you want to use in the [Select Printer] list, and then click [Preferences].
• The procedure to open the printer's properties dialog box may vary depending on the application.
For details, see the manuals provided with the application.
• Any settings you configure in the procedure above are valid for the current application only.
• General users can configure the settings displayed in the printer's properties dialog box of an
application. The settings configured here are used as defaults when printing from that application.
Mac OS X
1. Open the file you want to print.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. In the [Printer:] list, select the printer you want to use.
135
3. Using the Printer Function
Basic Operation in Printer Mode
The following procedure explains how to perform basic printing.
1. Open the printer properties dialog box in your document's application.
2. Set printing options as necessary, and then click [OK].
The printer properties dialog box closes.
3. Click [OK].
• If printing is restricted, you must enter a user code in the printer driver's properties before sending a
print job to the machine.
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must enable user authentication and enter a user name and
password in the printer driver's properties before sending a print job to the machine.
• If tray 2 is installed and automatic tray selection is specified for the print job, you can select the tray
the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under system settings.
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically.
• After printing on envelopes, make sure to pull up the levers for printing on envelopes back to their
original positions. Leaving the levers lowered can cause print quality problems when printing on
paper other than envelopes.
• For details about accessing the printer properties, see p.134 "Accessing the Printer Properties from
If a Paper Mismatch Occurs
If the paper size or type does not match the print job's settings, the machine reports an error. There are
two ways to resolve this error:
Continue printing using mismatched paper
Use the form-feed function to ignore the error and print using mismatched paper.
136
Basic Operation in Printer Mode
Reset the print job
Cancel printing.
• If [Auto Continue] under system settings is enabled, the machine ignores the paper type and size
settings and prints on whatever paper is loaded. Printing stops temporarily when the error is
detected, and restarts automatically after about ten seconds using the settings made on the control
panel.
Continuing printing using mismatched paper
1. While the error message is displayed, press [FormFeed].
Printing resumes on whatever paper is loaded.
• If the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
Resetting the print job
1. When the error message is displayed, press [JobReset].
Printing is canceled.
Canceling a Print Job
You can cancel print jobs using either the machine’s control panel or your computer, depending on the
status of the job.
Canceling a print job before printing has started
Cancel the print job from the computer.
Windows
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task bar of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
137
3. Using the Printer Function
Mac OS X 10.3
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences...].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Click [Set Up Printers…].
4. Double-click the machine from "Printer List".
5. Select the print job you want to cancel, and then click [Delete].
Mac OS X 10.4
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences...].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Double-click the machine from "Printer".
4. Select the print job you want to cancel, and then click [Delete].
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6
1. From the Apple menu, select [System Preferences...].
2. Under "Hardware", click [Print & Fax].
3. Double-click the machine from "Printers".
4. Select the print job you want to cancel, and then click [Delete].
• If the printer is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to cancel the print job of another user.
• If you cancel a print job that has already been processed, printing may continue for a few pages
before being canceled.
• You can also open the print job queue window by double-clicking the printer icon in the [Printers]
window.
• If you cancel a Locked Print job, the machine might have already stored some pages of the job as
a Locked Print file. If this happens, use the control panel to delete the Locked Print file.
• It may take a while to cancel a large print job.
Canceling a print job while printing
Cancel the print job using the control panel.
1. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
138
Printing Confidential Documents
Printing Confidential Documents
If you use the Locked Print function, you can password protect your print job.
This means that your job is printed only after you enter the password using the machine's control panel.
This function prevents unauthorized users seeing sensitive documents at the machine.
• This function is only available when using the PCL6 printer driver, and printing from a computer
running a Windows operating system.
Storing a Locked Print file
This section describes how to store a Locked Print file in the machine using the printer driver.
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. Open the printer driver's properties.
3. Click the [Setup] tab, and then select [Locked Print].
The [Password:] and [User ID:] text boxes become available.
The [User ID:] text box contains the login user name of your computer account or the user code that
you used for the previous Locked Print job.
4. Type the password (containing 4 to 8 digits) and user ID (containing 1 to 9 alphanumeric
characters), and then click [OK].
The user code will be used to identify your Locked Print file on the machine's control panel.
5. Execute a print command.
The print job is stored in the machine as a Locked Print file. You can print the file by entering the
password using the control panel.
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out, or
when the machine's power is turned off.
• The machine can store a maximum of 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print data at a time.
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files, the machine holds a new Locked Print
file for the period of time specified in [Locked Print] under system settings before canceling the job.
Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an
existing Locked Print file so that the new Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
• When a Locked Print job is canceled, the machine automatically records the cancellation in a log.
You can use this log to identify which Locked Print jobs have been canceled.
139
3. Using the Printer Function
Printing a Locked Print file
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job Press User Tools key” appears
on the machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.
Use the following procedure to unlock and print the Locked Print file.
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the file you want to print, and then press the [OK] key.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
3. Press [Print].
140
Printing Confidential Documents
4. Enter the password using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
The Locked Print file is printed.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] key or the [Facsimile]
key, and then press the [User Tools] key. To print a Locked Print file, press the [Copy] key to return
to the copier mode.
• If the machine is currently printing, you cannot print a Locked Print file. The machine beeps if you try
to do so.
• While in the Locked Print menu, the machine cannot receive new print jobs.
• The Locked Print file is automatically erased from the machine's memory when it is printed out or
canceled, or when the machine's power is turned off.
Deleting a Locked Print file
When there is a Locked Print file stored in the machine, “Locked Print Job Press User Tools key” appears
on the machine's control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.
Use the following procedure to delete a Locked Print file. You do not need to enter a password to delete
a Locked Print file.
141
3. Using the Printer Function
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the file you want to delete, and then press the [OK] key.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
3. Press [Delete].
The Locked Print file is deleted.
If there are Locked Print files/logs remaining in the machine, the display returns to the list of Locked
Print files/logs. If there are none remaining, the display returns to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] key or the [Facsimile]
key, and then press the [User Tools] key. To delete a Locked Print file, press the [Copy] key to
return to the copier mode.
Checking which Locked Print File Jobs Have Been Canceled
When a Locked Print job is canceled, the machine automatically records the cancellation in a log. If the
machine has created a cancellation log, “Locked Print Job Deleted Press User Tools key” will appear on
the control panel display when the machine is in the copier mode.
142
Printing Confidential Documents
Use the following procedure to check which Locked Print file jobs have been canceled.
1. When the Locked Print message is displayed, press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to find a file whose name starts with an "!" mark.
The "!" mark indicates that the job has been canceled.
Identify the Locked Print file by checking its time stamp and user ID.
To delete the log entry, proceed to the following steps.
3. Press the [OK] key.
4. Press [Delete].
The log is deleted.
If there are Locked Print logs/files remaining in the machine, the display returns to the list of Locked
Print logs/files. If there are none remaining, the display returns to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• To enter the menu for changing the machine's settings, press the [Scanner] key or the [Facsimile]
key, and then press the [User Tools] key. To check the Locked Print log, press the [Copy] key to
return to the copier mode.
143
3. Using the Printer Function
• The machine keeps a log of the 10 most recent canceled jobs. If a Locked Print file is canceled
when the machine's log is already full, the oldest log will be deleted automatically.
• The message “Locked Print Job Deleted Press User Tools key” disappears when all log entries are
cleared.
• The log will be cleared when the machine is turned off.
144
Manual Duplex Printing (Type 1 model)
Manual Duplex Printing (Type 1 model)
To print on both sides of paper using the Type 1 model, use the Manual Duplex function.
In Manual Duplex printing, the machine prints only even pages of a document first, asks you to reload
the output paper turned upside down into the machine, and then prints odd pages on the back sides of
the paper.
• This function is only available when printing from a computer running a Windows operating system
using the PCL6 printer driver.
• The machine always uses tray 1 to print on the back sides of paper, regardless of the tray you
selected with the printer driver. Make sure that the paper settings of the trays that will be used
match the paper settings of the print job to avoid paper mismatch errors.
1. Open the file you want to print on your computer.
2. Open the printer driver's properties.
3. On the [Setup] tab, select [Long edge bind (to left/top)] or [Short edge bind (to top/left)]
from the [Duplex:] list.
Manual duplex printing requires that [Zoom %] be set at 100% and [Print On] be checked on the
[Paper] tab. If not, a dialog box appears to inform you that the setting must be changed; clicking
[OK] will automatically change the settings.
4. Configure printing preferences according to your needs, and then click [OK] twice.
A Manual Duplex guidance screen appears on your computer showing the subsequent procedure,
and the machine starts printing even pages.
When all even pages are printed out, "Set Bck Side in Tray1" appears on the machine's control
panel display.
5. Reload the output paper into tray 1 with the printed side up.
If paper orientation is portrait, put the top of paper towards you for [Long edge bind (to left/top)]
or towards the machine rear for [Short edge bind (to top/left)].
If paper orientation is landscape, put the top of paper to the right for [Long edge bind (to left/top)]
or to the left for [Short edge bind (to top/left)].
6. Press [Continue].
Odd pages will then be printed.
• When you print a document whose page count is an odd number, a blank page is printed last. This
blank page is the last page of the document. When you start printing on the other side of the
paper, include this blank page in the bundle of paper.
145
3. Using the Printer Function
• For details about printer driver operation, see the printer driver Help.
146
Using Various Print Functions
Using Various Print Functions
This section briefly describes various print functions that you can configure with the printer driver to make
printouts appropriate for your purposes.
Print Quality Functions
Print quality and color tone can be adjusted to suit the print data. Some of the print quality settings you
can configure are described below.
Changing the image printing method
You can select to print with priority on print quality or print speed. When printing images, the higher
the resolution of images, the longer the time required for printing.
Changing the graphics mode
You can send graphic information to the machine as either all raster or a mixture of vector and
raster images. Most geometric shapes or patterns print faster as vector images than as raster
images. However, if certain graphics do not print as they appear on the screen, try to print them as
raster images.
Saving toner when printing
You can save toner by printing with lower toner consumption. While this increases the life of the
print cartridge, the output appears slightly lighter.
Changing the printable area
You can change the printable area when printing a document printed on a single page with one
machine is printed on two separate pages with another machine, or vice-versa.
Changing the method of downloading TrueType fonts to the machine
When you print documents that contain characters in TrueType fonts, garbled or distorted
characters may be printed. Changing the method of downloading TrueType fonts may help to solve
the problem.
Changing the dither pattern
A dither pattern is a pattern of dots used to simulate a color or shade of an image. If the pattern is
changed, the characteristics of the image will also change. You can select a pattern suitable for the
image to be printed.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
147
3. Using the Printer Function
Print Output Functions
You can specify the form of print outputs according to your purposes. This section briefly describes some
of the settings that you can specify.
Printing multiple sets of a document
You can print multiple sets of the same document.
Collating the output in document batches
You can print complete sets of a multiple-page document one set at a time (P1, P2, P1, P2 ...). If this
function is not used when printing multiple sets, prints will be output in page batches (P1, P1, P2,
P2 ...). This function is useful when, for example, making presentation materials.
Changing orientation or rotating the image
You can change the orientation of an image to portrait or landscape. You can also rotate the
image by 180 degrees. Use rotation to prevent an image from being printed upside down when
using paper that a predefined top and bottom (such as letterhead paper).
Printing multiple pages per sheet
You can print multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.
When using this function, a suitable reduction ratio is selected automatically based on the paper
size and the number of pages you want to fit on each sheet.
Printing on both sides of paper (duplex printing)
You can print on both sides of paper.
Duplex printing using the Type 2 model can be done automatically, and available binding options
include booklet.
Duplex printing using the Type 1 model requires manually reloading paper.
Reducing or enlarging the document
You can reduce or enlarge documents by a specific ratio, from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.
You can also reduce or enlarge documents automatically to fit a specific paper size. This function is
useful, for example, when printing Web pages.
If the [Enable Large Papers] option is selected, A3/11” × 17”/B4/8K documents can be scaled
to a size that the machine supports, so it can then be printed out.
Suppressing printing of blank pages
If a print job contains blank pages, they can be prevented from being printed.
Note that the printer driver's setting has higher priority than [Blank Page Print] under printer feature
settings of the control panel.
Printing with a cover page
You can add a cover page to the print job.
148
Using Various Print Functions
You can select to leave the cover page blank, or print the first page of the document on the cover
page. If a cover page is inserted into a duplex job, you can print on its back side also.
Paper for the cover page can either be the same as or different from the remaining pages.
Printing on custom size paper
You can print using non-standard size paper by specifying the size of the paper as custom size.
To specify a non-standard paper size, select [Custom Paper Size] from the [Document Size:] list,
and then click the [Custom Paper Size...] button in the lower part of the dialog box to configure the
paper size.
Superimposing text on prints (watermark)
You can superimpose watermark text on prints. Various predefined watermarks are provided. You
can also create your own watermarks.
• Some of the functions described above might not be available depending on the printer driver or
operating system. For details, see the printer driver Help.
149
3. Using the Printer Function
150
4. Using the Copier Function
This chapter describes the copier functions.
The Screen in Copier Mode
This section provides information about the screen when the machine is in copier mode.
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on.
If the scanner or fax screen is shown on the display, press the [Copy] key on the control panel to switch
to the copier screen.
CMF131
Screen in standby mode
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Current settings
Displays the current tray, reproduction ratio, and scan settings.
3. Selection key items
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.
4. Copy quantity
Displays the current copy quantity. You can change the copy quantity using the number keys.
• The start-up mode can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under [Admin. Tools].
151
4. Using the Copier Function
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must first log in to the machine by entering a user name and
password.
152
Basic Operation in Copier Mode
Basic Operation in Copier Mode
This section describes the basic procedure for making photocopies.
• The original in the ARDF or ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you
place originals both in the ARDF/ADF and on the exposure glass.
1. Press the [Copy] key.
CMF131
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ARDF/ADF.
If necessary, configure advanced photocopy settings.
3. To make multiple copies, enter the number of copies using the number keys.
4. Press the [Start] key.
CMF141
If you are using the Type 2 model, depending on the machine's settings, "Set Back Side" appears
on the screen when using the exposure glass.
• If you want to copy the back side of the original, proceed to the next step.
• If you want to end the job, press [ ]. A copy will be output.
5. Turn over the original on the exposure glass, and then press the [Start] key.
A 2-sided copy will be output, and "Set Front Side" appears on the screen.
153
4. Using the Copier Function
• If you want to copy the front side of the original again, turn over the original on the exposure
glass, and then return to step 4.
• If you want to end the job, press [ ].
• The maximum number of copies is 99.
• You can change the paper tray for the current job by pressing the [ ][ ] keys. You can also select
to change the paper tray automatically according to the paper size (A4 or Letter).
• You can select the paper tray for printing out copies in [Select Paper] under copy settings. If you set
the machine to switch between tray 1 and 2 automatically depending on the paper size in this
setting, you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under system
settings.
• When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can select whether copies are output
in collated sets, or in page batches in the [Sort] setting under copy settings.
• If [Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode], which is available only with the Type 2 model, is enabled, you
can copy both sides of original with the exposure glass and make a 2-sided copy.
• If the time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] under administrator settings passes without any
operation while "Set Back Side" or "Set Front Side" is shown on the screen, the copying will finish
automatically.
• To enable this function for the current job only, press [Dup/Comb] and select [Manual 2 Sided
Scan Mode]. To use it as the machine's default setting, configure [Duplex/Combine] under copy
settings.
• If a paper jam occurs, printing stops after the current page has been printed out. After the jammed
paper is removed, printing restarts from the jammed page automatically.
• If a scanning jam occurs in the ARDF or ADF, copying is canceled immediately. In this case, copy
the originals again starting from the jammed page.
154
Basic Operation in Copier Mode
Canceling a Copy
Follow the procedure below to cancel copying.
While scanning the original
If copying is canceled while the machine is scanning the original, copying is cancelled immediately
and there is no printout.
When the original is set in the ARDF or ADF, scanning stops immediately but pages that have
already been scanned completely will be copied.
While printing
If copying is canceled during printing, the photocopy process is canceled after the current page
has been printed out.
1. Press the [Copy] key.
CMF131
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
CMF135
155
4. Using the Copier Function
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
This section describes how to specify the reduction or enlargement ratio for the current job.
Scaling
There are two ways to set the scaling ratio: using a preset ratio or manually specifying a
customized ratio.
• Preset ratio
CES103
50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
• Custom ratio
CES106
25% to 400% in 1% increments.
Use this procedure to specify the reduction or enlargement ratio for the current job.
156
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies
1. Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key.
CMF136
2. Press [Reduce], [Enlarge], or [Zoom].
3. For [Reduce] or [Enlarge], press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys to select the desired ratio. For
[Zoom], specify the desired ratio using the number keys.
4. Press the [OK] key.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• You can change the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting to always make photocopies in
the specified ratio.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
157
4. Using the Copier Function
Combining Pages and Making 2-sided Copies
This section describes how to set the machine to combine multiple pages (2 or 4 pages) of an original
onto a single page. Also, with the Type 2 model, you can scan 2-sided originals and make 2-sided
copies.
• This function is only available when the original is set in the ARDF or ADF, not when it is set on the
exposure glass.
• For combine and 2-sided copying, the paper size must be A4, Letter or Legal.
• For 2-sided copying, the paper type must be thin, plain, recycled, color, preprinted, prepunched,
thick paper 1, or letterhead.
There are following copy modes. Select a copy mode according to your original and how you want the
copy outputs to appear.
Combined copy on 1 side
In this mode, copy will be made on 1 side, on which 2 or 4 pages of an original will be printed.
• 1Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd
Original
Copy
CMF250
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd
158
Combining Pages and Making 2-sided Copies
Original
Copy
Left to Right
Top to Bottom
Left to Right
Top to Bottom
CMF251
• 2Sd 1Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd (Type 2 model only)
Original
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CMF252
159
4. Using the Copier Function
Original
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CMF263
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd (Type 2 model only)
Original
Copy
Left to Right, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
CMF253
160
Combining Pages and Making 2-sided Copies
Original
Copy
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
Left to Right, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
CMF254
Combined copy on 2 sides (Type 2 model only)
In this mode, copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 2 or 4 pages of an original will be
printed.
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd
Original
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CMF255
• 1Sd8Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd
161
4. Using the Copier Function
Original
Copy
Left to Right, Top to Top
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
8
6
5
6
8
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
8
7
5
7
8
6
CMF256
Original
Copy
Left to Right, Top to Top
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
8
6
5
6
8
7
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
8
7
5
7
8
6
CMF257
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd
162
Combining Pages and Making 2-sided Copies
Original
Copy
Top to Top
4
3
Top to Bottom
4
3
CMF258
Original
Copy
Top to Top
3
4
Top to Bottom
4
3
CMF264
• 2Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd
163
4. Using the Copier Function
Original
Copy
Left to Right, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
6
5
7
5
8
7
8
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
8
7
8
6
5
7
CMF259
Original
Copy
Left to Right, Top to Top
Top to Bottom, Top to Top
6
5
7
5
8
7
8
6
Left to Right, Top to Bottom
Top to Bottom, Top to Bottom
8
7
8
6
5
7
CMF260
Copy on 2 sides (Type 2 model only)
In this mode, copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which a single page of an original will be
printed.
• 1 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy
164
Combining Pages and Making 2-sided Copies
Original
Copy
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
Top to Top
Top to Bottom
CMF261
• 2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy
Original
Copy
CMF262
Use this procedure to set copy mode for the current job.
1. Press [Dup/Comb].
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator
settings is set to [Dup/Comb Copy].
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired copy mode, and then press the [OK] key.
165
4. Using the Copier Function
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select page and binding orientations, and then press the [OK]
key.
The screen will show the selected copy mode.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• You can change the machine's default [Duplex/Combine] setting to always make photocopies in
combine/2-sided mode.
• Setting combined/2-sided copying automatically disables the [ID Card Copy] setting.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
166
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Side of Paper
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One
Side of Paper
This section describes how to copy the front and back sides of an ID card, or other small document, onto
one side of a sheet of paper.
When copying onto A4 size paper, you can copy documents that are smaller than A5 size. Likewise,
when copying onto a Letter size paper, you can copy documents that are smaller than Half Letter size.
• This function is only available when the original is set on the exposure glass, not when it is set in the
ARDF or ADF.
• To use this function, the paper size used for printing copies must be set to A4 or Letter.
• To use the [Shortcut to Func.] key to set ID card copy mode for the current job, [Shortcut to
Function] under administrator settings must be set to [ID Card Copy Mode].
CES165
To use this function, first switch to ID card copy mode for the current job, and then perform ID card copy.
1. Press the [Shortcut to Func.] key.
CMF137
The machine is now in ID card copy mode. Proceed to the following steps to perform the ID card
copy.
2. Place the original front side down and top to the machine rear on the exposure glass.
Place the original in the center of the A5/Half Letter scan area.
167
4. Using the Copier Function
CMF065
3. Press the [Start] key.
A message prompting you to place the original back side down on the exposure glass appears on
the display.
4. Within 30 seconds, place the original back side down and top to the machine rear on the
exposure glass, and then press the [Start] key again.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• Regardless of the machine's reduction or enlargement ratio setting, an ID card copy will always be
made at 100%.
• You can change the machine's default [Reduce/Enlarge] setting to always make photocopies in ID
card copy mode. In addition, if the [Shortcut to Func.] key is not set to [ID Card Copy Mode], you
must configure the machine's default setting to perform ID card copy.
• Setting this function for the current job temporarily disables combined/2-sided copying
automatically. However, after the temporary job setting is cleared, the combined/2-sided copying
will be enabled again automatically.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
168
Making 2-sided Copies Manually (Type 1 model)
Making 2-sided Copies Manually (Type 1
model)
This section describes how to make 2-sided copies by copying single-sided documents onto the front
and back sides of each sheet using the Type 1 model.
Perform duplex copying manually with the Type 1 model. It does not support automatic duplex copying.
1. Place the odd-numbered pages of the original in the ADF.
2. Press the [Copy] key.
3. Press the [Start] key.
4. Load the output paper into the current tray.
If using tray 1 or tray 2, reload the paper with the blank side down; if using the bypass tray, sort
the output paper in reverse order, and then load the paper with the blank side up.
Make sure to load paper with the top and bottom sides oriented correctly to avoid misprints.
5. Place the even-numbered pages of the original in the ADF.
6. Press the [Start] key.
• When making 2-sided copies, confirm which tray is used to feed paper from for making copies, by
checking the [Select Paper] setting under copy settings.
• If the [System Auto Reset Timer] under administrator setting is enabled, temporary job settings may
be cleared during the operation. Make sure to reconfigure the settings if they are cleared.
169
4. Using the Copier Function
Specifying Scan Settings
This section describes how to specify image density and quality for the current job.
Adjusting Image Density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the printout.
1. Press the [Density] key.
CMF138
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always make copies with a specific
density level.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
170
Specifying Scan Settings
Selecting the Document Type According to Original
This section describes how to select the best document type for the original that you are scanning.
There are three document types:
Mixed
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.
Text
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.
Photo
Select this when the original contains only photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following
types of original:
• Photographs
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.
CMF139
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired document type, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Original Type] setting to always make copies with a
specific document type.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
171
4. Using the Copier Function
172
5. Using the Scanner Function
This chapter describes the scanner functions.
There are two scanning methods: scanning using the control panel and scanning from the computer
(TWAIN scanning).
The Screen in Scanner Mode
This section provides information about the screen in scanner mode.
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on. If the copier or fax
screen is shown on the display, press the [Scanner] key on the control panel to switch to the scanner
screen.
CMF132
Screen in standby mode
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Current settings
Displays the current scanning mode and scan settings.
• When "Specify Dest." is displayed:
Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Folder functions can be used.
• When "Save Scn Data to USB" is displayed:
A USB flash disk is inserted in the machine, and the Scan to USB function can be used.
3. Selection key items
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.
173
5. Using the Scanner Function
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under
[Admin. Tools].
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must first log in to the machine by entering a user name and
password.
174
Registering Scan Destinations
Registering Scan Destinations
This section describes how to register scan destinations in the Address Book. To send scanned files to an
e-mail address (Scan to E-mail), FTP server (Scan to FTP), or a shared folder on a network computer
(Scan to Folder), you must first register the destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically.
• Depending on your network environment, the Scan to FTP and Scan to Folder functions may
require a user name and password to be correctly entered in the destination information. In such
cases, after registering destinations, check that the user name and password are correctly entered
by sending test documents to those destinations.
The Address Book can contain up to 100 entries, including 20 Quick Dial entries.
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding One Touch
button.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Scan Destination].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [E-mail Address], [FTP] or [Folder].
4. Register information as necessary.
The information you must register varies depending on the destination type. For details, see the
tables below.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
7. Close the Web browser.
175
5. Using the Scanner Function
Scan to E-mail Settings
Item
Setting
Description
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Name
Required
Required
E-mail address of the destination. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Destination E-mail Address
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Subject
Optional
Required
Subject of the e-mail. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Name of e-mail sender. The name specified here will
be shown under "From" or a similar field of the
recipient's email application. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Sender's Name
Optional
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Required
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
File Format (Black & White)
176
Registering Scan Destinations
Item
Setting
Description
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
Original
Required
Note that if 2-sided scanning is specified, you must use
the ARDF (scanning will not be possible with the
exposure glass).
(Type 2 model only)
Scan Size
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.
Optional
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Resolution
Optional
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
Density
buttons.
is the lightest, and
is the darkest.
Scan to FTP Settings
Item
Setting
Description
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Name
Required
177
5. Using the Scanner Function
Item
Setting
Description
Name or IP address of the FTP server. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
Hostname or IP Address
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Required
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
File Format (Black & White)
User name for logging in to the FTP server. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
FTP User Name
FTP Password
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Password for logging in to the FTP server. Can contain
up to 32 characters.
Name of the FTP server directory where scanned files
are stored. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Directory
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
Original
Required
Optional
Note that if 2-sided scanning is specified, you must use
the ARDF (scanning will not be possible with the
exposure glass).
(Type 2 model only)
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.
Scan Size
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Resolution
Density
Optional
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
buttons.
is the lightest, and
is the darkest.
178
Registering Scan Destinations
Scan to Folder Settings
Item
Setting
Description
Select when setting the destination as a Quick Dial
entry.
Quick Dial Number
Optional
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a scan
destination. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Name
Required
Required
Path to the directory where scanned files will be stored.
Consists of the IP address or name of the destination
computer (can contain up to 64 characters), and name
of the shared folder (can contain up to 32 characters).
Service Name
Specify the name of the domain to which the computer
belongs. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Domain
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
User name for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Login User Name
Login Password
Directory
Password for logging in to the destination computer.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
Directory within the shared folder for storing scanned
files. Can contain up to 64 characters.
E-mail address to which a notification is sent after
transmission. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Notification E-mail Address
179
5. Using the Scanner Function
Item
Setting
Description
File format of the scanned file when scanning in color.
PDF or JPEG can be selected. PDF supports multiple
pages in a document, but JPEG does not.
File Format (Color/Gray
Scale)
Required
File format of the scanned file when scanning in black
and white. PDF or TIFF can be selected. Both formats
support multiple pages in a document.
File Format (Black & White)
Required
Required
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to
scan according to the page and binding orientation.
Original
Note that if 2-sided scanning is specified, you must use
the ARDF (scanning will not be possible with the
exposure glass).
(Type 2 model only)
Select the scanning size for the original from A5, B5,
A4, Executive, Half Letter, Letter, Legal, or custom size.
Scan Size
Optional
If you select custom size, select [mm] or [Inch], and
then specify the width and length.
Select the scan resolution from 100×100, 150×150,
200×200, 300×300, 400×400, or 600×600 dpi.
Resolution
Density
Optional
Optional
Specify the image density by clicking the right or left
buttons.
is the lightest, and
is the darkest.
• To send files via e-mail, SMTP and DNS settings must be configured properly.
• If you are using the Scan to E-mail function, select a time zone according to your geographic
location to send email with correct transmission date and time.
• To send files to an FTP server or computer, the user name, password, and directory must be
configured properly.
• On a network that uses a DNS server, specify a computer name in [Service Name] and the name
of the domain to which the computer belongs in [Domain]. In this case, also configure the DNS
related settings using Web Image Monitor.
• The Scan to Folder destination must operate on one of the following operating systems: Windows
XP/Vista/7, Windows Server 2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2, or Mac OS X.
• Scan destinations cannot be registered using the control panel.
• The Scan to USB function does not require destinations registered in the Address Book.
180
Registering Scan Destinations
• To test sending files to a Scan to FTP or Scan to Folder destination, see p.183 "Basic Operation for
Modifying Scan Destinations
This section describes how to modify the information of registered destinations.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
• You can unassign a Quick Dial entry from a One-touch button from the [Quick Dial Destination]
page. To do this, select the desired entry, click [Delete], and then click [Apply] again on a
confirmation page.
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to modify is set as a forwarding destination
of received faxes.
Deleting Scan Destinations
This section describes how to delete registered destinations.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
181
5. Using the Scanner Function
2. Click [Scan Destination].
3. Click the [E-mail Address], [FTP], or [Folder] tab.
4. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
5. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
• The machine will notify you if the destination you want to delete is set as a forwarding destination of
received faxes. If you delete the destination anyway, reconfigure the fax forwarding setting.
182
Scanning Using the Control Panel
Scanning Using the Control Panel
Scanning using the control panel allows you to send scanned files via e-mail (Scan to E-mail), to an FTP
server (Scan to FTP), or to the shared folder of a computer on a network (Scan to Folder), or to a USB
flash disk (Scan to USB).
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder functions are available only through a network
connection. No network connection is required for the Scan to USB function; you can send scanned files
directly to a USB flash disk inserted into the front of the machine.
Basic Operation for Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
This section describes the basic operation for sending scanned files via E-mail, to an FTP server, or to a
computer. The scanned file is sent via E-mail, to an FTP server, or a computer, depending on the
specified destination.
• The original in the ARDF or ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you
place originals both in the ARDF/ADF and on the exposure glass.
• When using the Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP or Scan to Folder function, you must first register the
destination in the Address Book using Web Image Monitor.
• If a USB flash disk is inserted in the machine, scanning functions other than Scan to USB are not
possible from the control panel. Make sure there is no USB flash disk inserted in the machine.
1. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ARDF/ADF.
2. Press the [Scanner] key, and then press the [Address Book] key.
CMF140
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator
settings is set to [Select Scanner Dest.].
183
5. Using the Scanner Function
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.
If you want to search for a specific entry by its name, enter the first letters of the name using the
number keys, and then press the [OK] key. Each time you enter a character, the display changes to
show the matching name.
4. Search for the desired destination by pressing the [ ][ ] keys to scroll the Address Book,
and then press the [OK] key.
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change
the scan settings using the control panel.
5. Press the [Start] key.
CMF141
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step.
6. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
7. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Scanner] key, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files
are discarded.
• You can configure the machine to scan documents in black and white, color, or grayscale by
changing the [Scanning Mode] setting under scanner settings.
• You can also specify a destination using the One Touch buttons, [Pause/Redial] key, or from an
LDAP server.
184
Scanning Using the Control Panel
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under scanner settings is enabled, you can place originals on the
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure.
• If [File Type] under scanner settings is set to [Multi-page], you can scan multiple pages to create a
single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file format is JPEG, a single-page file
will be created for every page scanned.
• If paper is jammed in the ARDF or ADF, the scan job will be discarded. Remove the jammed paper
and scan the entire originals again.
• For details about specifying the scan destination, see p.185 "Specifying the scan destination using
• For details about [Scanning Mode], [File Type], or [Limitless Scan], see p.263 "Scanner Settings".
Specifying the scan destination using the One Touch buttons or [Pause/Redial] key
This section describes how to specify a destination using the following keys:
• One Touch buttons
Use these to specify destinations registered as Quick Dial entries.
• [Pause/Redial] key
Press this to specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
Using the One Touch buttons
Press the One Touch button to which the desired Quick Dial entry is registered.
Press the [Shift] key to use the Quick Dial entries Nos. 11 to 20.
185
5. Using the Scanner Function
CMF142
Using the [Pause/Redial] key
Press the [Pause/Redial] key to select the last used destination.
CMF143
• When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book. If necessary, you can change
the scan settings using the control panel.
• The [Pause/Redial] key is not effective for the first scan job after the machine is turned on.
• To select destinations not registered as Quick Dial entries, use the [Address Book] key.
Specifying the scan destination from an LDAP server
This section describes how to select a destination registered on the LDAP server.
• To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be registered in advance,
and [LDAP Search] must be enabled under the LDAP server settings.
186
Scanning Using the Control Panel
• You can search Scan to E-mail destinations from the LDAP server (not Scan to FTP or Scan to Folder
destinations).
1. Press the [Scanner] key.
CMF132
2. Press the [Address Book] key.
CMF140
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search LDAP], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Start LDAP Search], and then press the [OK] key.
A list of destinations that match the search conditions appears on the display (up to 50).
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to scroll through the search result, and then press [ ] to select the
desired destination.
You can select multiple destinations. A check mark will appear for the selected destinations. To
deselect a destination, press [ ] again.
• The search result will contain destinations that match the predefined search conditions.
• To send scanned files to the destinations specified from the LDAP server, you must select the file
format after pressing the [Start] key to execute scanning. The file format depends on the [Scanning
Mode] setting under scanner settings:
• When in black-and-white scanning mode: TIFF or PDF
• When in color or gray scale scanning mode: JPEG or PDF
187
5. Using the Scanner Function
• The scanned files to the destinations specified from the LDAP server will be created with the
machine's current scan settings. If necessary, configure the scan settings before executing scanning.
• If a record that has been found contains multiple destinations, the first of those destinations will be
used.
Basic Operation for Scan to USB
This section describes the basic operation for sending scanned files to a USB flash disk.
• The original in the ARDF or ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you
place originals both in the ARDF/ADF and on the exposure glass.
• This machine does not support the use of USB flash disks connected to external USB hubs. Insert
your USB flash disk directly into the USB flash disk port located at the top left corner of the
machine.
• Certain types of USB flash disks cannot be used.
• If [Save Scn Data to USB] under administrator settings is disabled, this function cannot be used.
1. Insert your USB flash disk into the USB flash disk port.
CMF066
188
Scanning Using the Control Panel
2. Press the [Scanner] key.
CMF132
"Loading..." appears on the display. Wait until the display changes to show "Save Scn Data to
USB" (the duration depends on your USB flash disk).
3. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ARDF/ADF.
If necessary, configure advanced scan settings.
4. Press the [Start] key.
CMF141
Depending on the machine's setting, you will see the following screen on the display.
• When in black-and-white scanning mode:
• When in color or gray scale scanning mode:
189
5. Using the Scanner Function
5. Press the appropriate selection key according to the desired file format.
Depending on the machine's settings, you may see the following screen on the display when
scanning from the exposure glass.
If you see this screen, proceed to the next step. If not, proceed to step 8.
6. If you have more originals to scan, place the next original on the exposure glass, and
then press [Yes]. Repeat this step until all originals are scanned.
7. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the scanned file.
8. Confirm that "Ready" appears on the display.
The scanned file is created in the root directory of the USB flash disk.
9. Remove the USB flash disk from the machine.
• To cancel scanning, press the [Scanner] key, and then press the [Clear/Stop] key. The scan files
are discarded.
• You can configure the machine to scan documents in black and white, color, or grayscale by
changing the [Scanning Mode] setting under scanner settings.
• If the [Limitless Scan] setting under scanner settings is enabled, you can place originals on the
exposure glass repeatedly in a single scan procedure.
• If the [File Type] setting under scanner settings is enabled, you can scan multiple pages to create a
single PDF or TIFF file containing all pages. However, if the file format is JPEG, a single-page file
will be created for every page scanned.
• If paper is jammed in the ARDF/ADF or an access error to the USB flash disk occurs, the scan job
will be discarded. Remove the jammed paper and scan the entire originals again.
• For details about [Scanning Mode], [Limitless Scan], or [File Type], see p.263 "Scanner Settings".
190
Scanning Using the Control Panel
Specifying the Scan Settings
This section describes how to specify the scanning size, image density, and resolution for the current job.
When a scan destination is specified
When you specify a scan destination, the machine's scan settings change automatically according
to the information registered for that destination in the Address Book.
This allows you to send scanned files without having to reconfigure the scan settings according to
each destination. If necessary, you can change the scan settings using the control panel.
• The machine maintains the preset scan settings for the current destination until the machine returns
to standby mode.
• Changing the preset scan settings for the current destination does not change the information
registered in the Address Book.
• If you specify the last used destination, the preset scan settings become effective again, even if you
have changed the settings for the previous job.
Specifying the scanning size according to the size of the original
This section describes how to specify the scanning size according to the size of the current original.
1. Press the [Reduce/Enlarge] key or [Scn Size].
CMF136
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the size of the original, and then press the [OK] key.
If you selected anything other than [Custom Size], you do not need to perform the remaining steps
of the procedure.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [mm] or [inch], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Enter the width using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
191
5. Using the Scanner Function
5. Enter the length using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
To enter a decimal point, press [ ].
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• You can change the machine's default [Scan Size] setting to always scan originals with a specific
scanning size.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Adjusting image density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are five image density levels. The higher the density level, the darker the scanned image.
1. Press the [Density] key.
CMF138
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
192
Scanning Using the Control Panel
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are six resolution settings. The higher the resolution, the higher the quality but greater the file size.
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.
CMF139
2. Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys to select the desired resolution, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
193
5. Using the Scanner Function
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying the scanning side according to the original (Type 2 model)
If you are using the Type 2 model, you can specify the machine to scan both sides of original
automatically using the ARDF.
This section describes how to specify the scanning side according to the current original.
1. Press [Original].
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired scanning method, and then press the [OK] key.
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to scan. When scanning 2-sides, select the page
and binding orientations according to the original.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• If 2-sided scanning is specified, you must use the ARDF (scanning will not be possible with the
exposure glass).
• You can change the machine's default [Original] setting to always scan specific sides of originals.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
194
Scanning from a Computer
Scanning from a Computer
Scanning from a computer (TWAIN scanning) allows you to operate the machine from your computer
and scan originals into your computer directly.
TWAIN scanning is available with both USB and network connections.
Basic Operation for TWAIN Scanning
You can perform TWAIN scanning by using a TWAIN-compatible application.
If no TWAIN-compatible application is installed on your computer, install one.
• A CD-ROM containing a TWAIN-compliant application (Presto! PageManager) is provided with
the machine. For details, see the manual of Presto! PageManager.
Settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box
This section describes the settings you can configure in the TWAIN dialog box.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CMF146
1. Scanner:
Select the scanner you want to use. The scanner you select becomes the default scanner. Click [Refresh] to
discover all available scanners connected via USB or the network.
195
5. Using the Scanner Function
2. Original:
Select [Reflective] to scan from the exposure glass, or [Automatic Document Feeder] to scan from the ARDF or
ADF.
3. Original type
According to your original, select a setting from the list of options detailed below, or select [Custom...] to
configure your own scan settings.
• When using the exposure glass:
[Editing Text(OCR)]
Select this to scan business letters, contracts, memos, or other documents in editable form.
[Faxing, Filing or Copying]
Select this to scan newspaper and magazine articles, receipts, forms, or other printed text material.
[Black and White Photo]
Select this to scan black and white photographs as grayscale images.
[Color Document - fast]
Select this to scan originals with many graphics, originals with both text and graphics, line art, or color
photographs in fast scan mode.
[Color Document - Better Quality]
Select this to scan originals with many graphics, originals with both text and graphics, line art, or color
photographs in high-resolution scan mode.
[Custom...]
Select this to configure your own scan settings. You can save or delete your custom scan settings by
clicking [Save As] or [Delete], respectively.
• When using the ARDF or ADF:
[ADF-Faster]
Select this to scan originals with many graphics, originals with both text and graphics, line art, or color
photographs in fast scan mode.
[ADF-Better]
Select this to scan originals with many graphics, originals with both text and graphics, line art, or color
photographs in high-resolution scan mode.
[ADF-gray]
Select this to scan originals with many graphics, originals with both text and graphics, line art, or color
photographs as grayscale images.
[Custom...]
Select this to configure your own scan settings. You can save or delete your custom scan settings by
clicking [Save As] or [Delete], respectively.
4. Mode:
Select from color, grayscale, or black-and-white.
5. Resolution:
Select a resolution from the list. If you select [User defined], enter a resolution value directly in the edit box.
Note that increasing the resolution also increases the file size and scanning time.
196
Scanning from a Computer
Selectable resolutions vary depending on where the original is set.
• When using the exposure glass:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 dpi, User defined
• When using the ARDF or ADF:
75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi, User defined
6. Size:
Select the scanning size. If you select [User defined], enter the scanning size directly in the edit box. Also, you
can change the scanning size with your mouse in the preview area. You can select the unit of measure from
[cm], [inches], or [pixels].
7. Duplex or Scan task:
• Duplex (when using the ARDF, Type 2 model only)
Select this to scan both sides of an original using the ARDF. To use this function, also select paper and
binding orientations according the original.
• [2 Sided Portrait: Top to Top]: for portrait original with top-to-top binding
• [2 Sided Portrait: Top to Bottom]: for portrait original with top-to-bottom binding
• [2 Sided Landscape: Top to Top]: for landscape original with top-to-top binding
• [2 Sided Landscape: Top to Bottom]: for landscape original with top-to-bottom binding
• Scan task: (when using the exposure glass)
Displays a maximum of 10 previously used scan areas. To remove a scan task, select the number of the
task, and then click [Remove]. You can select [AutoCrop] to let the scanner automatically detect the size
of your original.
• If the scan data is larger than the memory capacity, an error message appears and scanning is
canceled. If this happens, specify a lower resolution and scan the original again.
197
5. Using the Scanner Function
198
6. Using the Fax Function
This chapter describes the fax functions.
The Screen in Fax Mode
This section provides information about the screen in fax mode.
By default, the display shows the copier screen when the machine is turned on.
If the copy or scanner screen is shown on the display, press the [Facsimile] key on the control panel to
switch to the fax screen.
CMF133
Screen in standby mode
CMF102
1. Current status or messages
Displays the current status or messages.
2. Current settings
Displays the current density and resolution settings.
3. Selection key items
Displays the functions you can use by pressing the corresponding selection keys.
4. Current date and time
Shows the current date and time.
• The machine's default mode at power on can be specified in the [Function Priority] setting under
[Admin. Tools].
199
6. Using the Fax Function
• The display format for time and date can be specified in [Set Date/Time] under [Admin. Tools].
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must first log in to the machine by entering a user name and
password.
200
Setting the Date and Time
Setting the Date and Time
This section describes how to set the time and date for the machine's internal clock, and how to select the
display format.
• Date
Year, month, date, and date format (Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day)
• Time
Hour, minute, time format (12- or 24-hour), and AM/PM stamp (when 12-hour time format is
selected)
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Set Date/Time], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Set Date], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired date format, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Enter the current date using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
You can press the [ ][ ] keys to move between fields.
8. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Set Time], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired time format, and then press the [OK] key.
10. Enter the current time using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key.
If you selected [12-hour Format], press the [ ][ ] keys to select [AM] or [PM].
You can press the [ ][ ] keys to move between fields.
11. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
201
6. Using the Fax Function
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• If an incorrect time or date is input, the machine automatically corrects it to the nearest valid time or
date.
202
Registering Fax Destinations
Registering Fax Destinations
This section describes how to register fax destinations in the Address Book using the control panel or
Web Image Monitor. The Address Book allows you to specify fax destinations quickly and easily.
• The Address Book data could be damaged or lost unexpectedly. The manufacturer shall not be
responsible for any damages resulting from such data loss. Be sure to create backup files of the
Address Book data periodically.
The Address Book can contain up to 220 entries (20 Quick Dial entries and 200 Speed Dial entries).
Quick Dial entries
Destinations registered as Quick Dial entries can be selected by pressing the corresponding One
Touch button.
Speed Dial entries
Destinations registered as Speed Dial entries can be selected from the Address Book. Press the
[Address Book] key, select [Search Address Book], and then select the desired entry using the [ ]
[ ] keys.
Registering Fax Destinations Using the Control Panel
This section describes how to register destinations using the control panel.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
203
6. Using the Fax Function
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Quick Dial Dest.] or [Fax Speed Dial Dest.], and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [No.], and then enter the desired Quick Dial number (1 to
20) or Speed Dial number (1 to 200) using the number keys.
If a destination is already registered for the input number, the fax number and fax name registered
for that number appear.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax No.], and then enter the fax number (up to 40
characters).
7. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Name], and then enter the fax name (up to 20 characters).
8. Confirm the setting, and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
fax transmission settings.
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside
line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number.
• Use Web Image Monitor to register an Internet Fax destination (an e-mail address).
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• For details about registering an Internet Fax destination, see p.206 "Registering Fax Destinations
Modifying fax destinations
This section describes how to modify the information of registered destinations.
204
Registering Fax Destinations
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Quick Dial Dest.] or [Fax Speed Dial Dest.], and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [No.], and then enter the desired Quick Dial number (1 to
20) or Speed Dial number (1 to 200) using the number keys.
The fax number and fax name registered for that number appear.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax No.], and then modify the fax number (up to 40
characters).
7. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Name], and then modify the fax name (up to 20
characters).
8. Confirm the setting, and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Deleting fax destinations
This section describes how to delete registered destination.
205
6. Using the Fax Function
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Quick Dial Dest.] or [Fax Speed Dial Dest.], and then press
the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [No.], and then enter the desired Quick Dial number (1 to
20) or Speed Dial number (1 to 200) using the number keys.
The fax number and fax name registered for that number appear.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax No.], and then press the [ ] key repeatedly until the
current number is deleted.
7. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Name], and then press the [ ] key repeatedly until the
current name is deleted.
8. Confirm the setting, and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Registering Fax Destinations Using Web Image Monitor
This section describes how to register destinations using Web Image Monitor.
1. Start the Web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
206
Registering Fax Destinations
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Fax].
4. Select [Quick Dial Number] or [Speed Dial Number], and then select the registration
number from the list.
5. Register information as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
Fax destination settings
Item
Setting
Required
Description
Quick Dial Number /
Speed Dial Number
Select the number to which you want to register Quick
Dial or Speed Dial destination.
Name of the destination. The name specified here will
be shown on the screen when selecting a fax
destination. Can contain up to 20 characters.
Name
Optional
Fax number of the destination. Can contain up to 40
characters.
If the machine is connected to the telephone network
through a PBX, make sure to enter the outside line
access number specified in [PBX Access Number]
before the fax number.
Fax Number
Optional
Optional
E-mail address of the destination of the Internet Fax.
Can contain up to 64 characters.
E-mail Address
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in the fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
fax transmission settings.
207
6. Using the Fax Function
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in the fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
Modifying fax destinations
This section describes how to modify the information of registered destinations.
1. Start the Web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
If you modify the Speed Dial entry, proceed to step 4.
3. Click [Fax Quick Dial Destination].
4. Select the entry to modify, and then click [Change].
5. Modify settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
Deleting fax destinations
This section describes how to delete registered destination.
1. Start the Web browser and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Quick Dial Destination] or [Fax Speed Dial Destination].
If you delete the Speed Dial entry, proceed to step 4.
3. Click [Fax Quick Dial Destination].
4. Select the entry to delete, and then click [Delete].
5. Confirm that the entry you have selected is the entry that you want to delete.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
208
Sending a Fax
Sending a Fax
This section describes the transmission modes and the basic operations for sending a fax.
• It is recommended that you call the receiver and confirm with them when sending important
documents.
Selecting Transmission Mode
This section describes how to select the transmission mode.
There are two transmission modes: Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmission.
Memory Transmission
In this mode, the machine scans several originals into memory and sends them all at once. This is
convenient when you are in a hurry and want to take the document away from the machine. In this
mode, you can send a fax to multiple destinations.
Select this mode when scanning 2-sides of original and send them using the ARDF with the Type 2
model.
Immediate Transmission
In this mode, the machine scans the original and faxes it simultaneously, without storing it in
memory. This is convenient when you want to send an original quickly. In this mode, you can only
specify one destination.
Note that if the machine is in this mode, only one side of the original is scanned using the ARDF
regardless of the ARDF original setting for the Type 2 model.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key, and then press the [ ][ ] keys.
CMF144
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator
settings is set to [Fax Immediate TX].
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Immediate TX], and then press the [OK] key.
209
6. Using the Fax Function
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Off], [On], or [Next Fax Only], and then press the [OK]
key.
For Memory Transmission, select [Off].
For Immediate Transmission, select [On] or [Next Fax Only].
4. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Internet Fax Transmission Overview
You can send faxes over the Internet. When you send faxes to Internet Fax destinations, the machine
converts scanned images to TIFF-F format files and send them as attachments to e-mail.
• The level of security for Internet communications is low. It is recommended that you use the
telephone network for confidential communications.
• Internet Fax delivery might be delayed due to network congestion. Use a public telephone line if
the fax needs to be delivered in a timely manner.
• The Internet Fax function supported by this machine is compliant with ITU-T Recommendation T.37
(Simple Mode).
• To use the Internet Fax function, network settings must be configured properly.
• Internet Fax transmission may take some time before it starts. The machine needs a certain amount
of time to convert data in memory prior to transmission.
• Depending on e-mail environment conditions, you may not be able to fax large images.
• The "Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution
if "Photo" resolution has been specified.
• If the faxes are received on a computer, a viewer application needs to be installed in order to view
the documents.
210
Sending a Fax
Basic Operation for Sending a Fax
This section describes the basic operation for sending a fax.
• The original in the ARDF or ADF takes precedence over the original on the exposure glass if you
place originals both in the ARDF/ADF and on the exposure glass.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Place the original on the exposure glass or in the ARDF/ADF.
If necessary, configure the advanced scan settings.
3. Enter the fax number (up to 40 characters) using the number keys, or specify a
destination using the One Touch buttons or Speed Dial function.
• If the machine is connected to the telephone network through a PBX, make sure to enter the
outside line access number specified in [PBX Access Number] before the fax number.
• To specify an Internet Fax destination, use the One Touch buttons or Speed Dial function.
4. Press the [Start] key.
CMF141
• Depending on the machine's settings, you may be prompted to enter the fax number again if
you manually entered the destination fax number. In this case, re-enter the number within 30
211
6. Using the Fax Function
seconds, press [OK], and then press the [Start] key. If the fax numbers do not match, go back
to step 3.
• When using the exposure glass in Memory Transmission mode, you will be prompted to place
another original. In this case, proceed to the next step.
5. If you have more originals to scan, press [Yes] within 60 seconds, place the next original
on the exposure glass, and then press [OK]. Repeat this step until all originals are
scanned.
If you do not press [Yes] within 60 seconds, the machine will start to dial the destination.
6. When all originals have been scanned, press [No] to start sending the fax.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
fax transmission settings.
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• You can also specify a destination from an LDAP server or with the [Pause/Redial] key.
• You can specify multiple destinations and broadcast the fax you are sending.
• The machine prompts you to enter the fax number twice only when you dial the destination
manually. Destinations specified using the One Touch buttons, Speed Dial function, or [Pause/
Redial] key need not be confirmed.
• When in Memory Transmission mode, you can enable the [Auto Redial] setting under fax
transmission settings to set the machine to automatically redial the destination if the line is busy or
an error occurs during transmission.
• When in Memory Transmission mode, the machine's memory may become full while scanning the
originals. In this case, the screen prompts you to cancel the transmission or to send only the pages
that have been scanned successfully.
• If you specify an Internet Fax destination in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to
Memory Transmission mode temporarily.
• If paper is jammed in the ARDF or ADF, the jammed page has not been scanned properly. When
the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, resend the fax starting from the jammed page.
When in Memory Transmission mode, scan the entire originals again.
212
Sending a Fax
• For details about specifying destinations using the One Touch buttons, Speed Dial function, LDAP
Canceling a fax
Follow the procedure below to cancel sending a fax.
When in Immediate Transmission mode
If you cancel sending a fax while the machine is scanning the original, the fax transmission process
is canceled immediately. In this case, an error is displayed on the other party's machine.
When in Memory Transmission mode
If you cancel sending a fax while the machine is scanning the original, the machine will not send
the document.
If you cancel sending a fax during transmission, the fax transmission process is canceled
immediately. In this case, an error is displayed on the other party's machine.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
213
6. Using the Fax Function
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
CMF135
• If you cancel sending a fax while broadcasting, only the fax to the current destination is canceled.
The fax will be sent to the subsequent destinations as normal.
Specifying the Fax Destination
This section describes how to specify the destination when sending a fax.
Other than entering the destination fax number using the number keys, you can specify destinations
using the following functions:
• Using the One Touch buttons
• Using Speed Dial
• Using the LDAP server search function
• Using the Broadcast function
• Using the Redial function
Specifying the destination using the One Touch buttons
This section describes how to select a destination registered as a Quick Dial entry using One Touch
buttons.
214
Sending a Fax
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the One Touch button to which the desired Quick Dial entry is registered.
Press the [Shift] key if you want to use Quick Dial entries Nos. 11 to 20 before pressing a One
Touch button.
CMF142
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report.
Specifying the destination using Speed Dial
This section describes how to select a destination registered as a Speed Dial entry.
215
6. Using the Fax Function
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the [Address Book] key.
CMF140
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search Address Book], and then press the [OK] key.
If you want to search for a specific entry by its registration number or name, use the following
procedure:
• Searching by the registration number
Press the [Address Book] key again, enter the number using the number keys, and then press
the [OK] key.
• Searching by the name
Enter the first letters of the name using the number keys, and then press the [OK] key. Each
time you enter a character, the display changes to show the matching name.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired Speed Dial entry, and then press the [OK] key.
• The Address Book shows only the Speed Dial entries. Use the One Touch buttons to specify Quick
Dial destinations.
• You can check the registered names and fax numbers by printing a report.
216
Sending a Fax
Specifying the destination from an LDAP server
This section describes how to select a destination registered on the LDAP server.
• To search for a destination from an LDAP server, the LDAP server must be registered in advance,
and [LDAP Search] must be enabled under the LDAP server settings.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the [Address Book] key.
CMF140
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search LDAP], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Start LDAP Search], and then press the [OK] key.
A list of destinations that match the search conditions appears on the display (up to 50).
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to scroll through the search result, and then press [ ] to select the
desired destination.
You can select multiple destinations. A check mark will appear for the selected destinations. To
deselect a destination, press [ ] again.
217
6. Using the Fax Function
• The search result will contain destinations that match the predefined search conditions.
• If a record that has been found contains multiple destinations, the first of those destinations will be
used.
Specifying the destination using the broadcast function
You can send a fax to multiple destinations simultaneously. You can broadcast faxes to a maximum of
100 destinations (including both normal fax destinations and Internet Fax destinations).
Faxes are sent to destinations in the order they were specified.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Add a destination by using one of the following methods:
• To add a Quick Dial destination: press a corresponding One Touch button.
• To add a Speed Dial destination: press the [Address Book] key, select [Search Address
Book], select a destination, and then press the [OK] key.
• To add a manually-specified destination: confirm that [No.key] is pressed, and then enter the
destination fax number using the number keys.
• To add a destination from an LDAP server: follow the procedure in "Specifying the destination
from an LDAP server".
3. Press the [OK] key.
Press [List] to see the list of destinations that have been added so far.
Go back to step 2 to add further destinations.
218
Sending a Fax
• While specifying multiple destinations, you can press the [Clear/Stop] key to clear all destinations.
• If you specify multiple destinations in Immediate Transmission mode, the mode switches to Memory
Transmission mode temporarily.
• If the destinations contain both normal fax destinations and Internet Fax destinations, the fax will be
sent to the Internet Fax destinations first.
• While broadcasting, pressing the [Clear/Stop] key cancels the fax to the current destination only.
Specifying the destination using the redial function
You can specify the last used destination as the destination for the current job.
This function saves time when you are sending to the same destination repeatedly, as you do not have to
enter the destination each time.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the [Pause/Redial] key.
CMF143
219
6. Using the Fax Function
Useful Sending Functions
This section explains some useful fax functions.
You can confirm the status of the other party's machine easily before sending a fax by using the On
Hook Dial function. If you have an extra telephone, you can talk and send a fax in one call.
• This function is available in Immediate Transmission mode only.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Sending a fax using On Hook Dial
The On Hook Dial function allows you to check the destination's status while listening to the tone from the
internal speaker. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax will be received.
• The On Hook Dial function cannot be used when [Fax Number Confirmation] under administrator
settings is enabled.
1. Place the original.
2. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
220
Sending a Fax
3. Press the [On Hook Dial] key.
CMF145
"On Hook" appears on the screen.
4. Specify the destination using the number keys.
5. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [Start] key.
CMF141
6. Press [TX], and then press the [Start] key.
Sending a fax after a conversation
An external telephone allows you to send a fax after finishing your conversation, without having to
disconnect and redial. This function is useful when you want to ensure that the fax will be received.
1. Place the original.
221
6. Using the Fax Function
2. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
4. Specify the destination using the external telephone.
5. When the other party answers, ask them to press their fax start button.
6. If you hear a high pitched tone, press the [Start] key.
CMF141
7. Press [TX], and then press the [Start] key.
8. Replace the handset.
Specifying the Scan Settings
This section describes how to specify image density and resolution for the current scan job.
Adjusting image density
This section describes how to adjust image density for the current job.
There are three image density levels. The darker the density level, the darker the printout.
222
Sending a Fax
1. Press the [Density] key.
CMF138
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired density level, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Density] setting to always scan with a specific density level.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying the resolution
This section describes how to specify the scan resolution for the current job.
There are three resolution settings:
Standard
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized characters.
Detail
Select this when the original is a document with small print.
Photo
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.
223
6. Using the Fax Function
1. Press the [Image Quality] key.
CMF139
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired resolution setting, and then press the [OK] key.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• You can change the machine's default [Resolution] setting to always scan with a specific resolution
level.
• The "Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution
if "Photo" resolution has been specified.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
Specifying the scanning side according to the original (Type 2 model)
If you are using the Type 2 model, you can specify the machine to scan both sides of original
automatically using the ARDF.
This section describes how to specify the scanning side according to the current original.
• If the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, this function is not available.
224
Sending a Fax
1. Press [Original].
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired scanning method, and then press the [OK] key.
Select the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) to scan. When scanning 2-sides, select the page
and binding orientations according to the original.
• Press the [Escape] key to discard the current change and return to the initial screen.
• If 2-sided scanning is specified, you must use the ARDF (scanning will not be possible with the
exposure glass).
• You can change the machine's default [Original] setting to always scan specific sides of originals.
• Temporary job settings are cleared in the following cases:
• When no input is received for the period of time specified in [System Auto Reset Timer] while
the initial screen is displayed.
• When the [Clear/Stop] key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed.
• When the machine's mode is changed.
• When the power is turned off.
• When the machine's default for the same setting is changed.
225
6. Using the Fax Function
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-
Fax)
This section describes how to use the fax function of the machine from a computer.
You can send a document directly from a computer through this machine to another fax machine,
without printing the document.
• This function is supported by Windows XP/Vista/7, and Windows Server 2003/2003
R2/2008/2008 R2. Mac OS X does not support this function.
Configuring the LAN-Fax Address Book
This section describes the LAN-Fax Address Book. Configure the LAN-Fax Address Book on the
computer. The LAN-Fax Address Book allows you to specify LAN-Fax destinations quickly and easily.
The LAN-Fax Address Book can contain up to 1000 entries, including individual destinations and
groups of destinations.
• You can configure separate LAN-Fax Address Books for each user account on your computer.
• You can import and export the LAN-Fax Address Book as required.
Opening the LAN-Fax Address Book
This section describes how to open the LAN-Fax Address Book.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the LAN-Fax driver, and then click [Printing Preferences].
226
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
3. Click the [Address Book] tab.
• From the [View:] list, you can select the type of destinations to display.
• [All]: Displays all destinations.
• [Group]: Displays groups only.
• [User]: Displays individual destinations only.
Registering destinations
This section describes how to register destinations in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Add User].
2. Register the required information and click [OK].
For details, see the table below.
227
6. Using the Fax Function
Setting LAN-Fax destinations
Item
Name
Setting
Required
Description
Name of the destination. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Company name of the destination. Can contain up to 64
characters. You can select from registered data.
Company
Optional
Optional
Department name of the destination. Can contain up to 64
characters. You can select from registered data.
Department
Telephone number of the destination. Can contain up to 40
characters.
Telephone
Fax
Optional
Required
Fax number of the destination. Can contain up to 40 characters.
• A telephone number or fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-" and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
fax transmission settings.
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. To
register the destination under a different name, click [No] and enter a different name. Clicking [Yes]
allows you to register it under the same name.
• You can partly modify an existing destination and register it as a new one with similar information.
Modifying destinations
This section describes how to modify registered destinations.
228
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the destination you want to modify from the
[User List:], and then click [Edit].
2. Modify information as necessary, and then click [OK].
Click [Save as new User] if you want to register a new destination with similar information. This is
useful when you want to register a series of destinations that contain similar information. To close
the dialog box without modifying the original destination, click [Cancel].
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. To
register the destination under a different name, click [No] and enter a different name. Clicking [Yes]
allows you to register it under the same name.
Registering groups
This section describes how to register groups of destinations.
A group can contain up to 100 individual destinations.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Add Group].
2. Enter the group name in [Group Name].
229
6. Using the Fax Function
3. Select the destination you want to include in the group from [User List:], and then click
[Add].
To delete a destination from a group, select the destination you want to delete from [List of Group
Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. Click [OK].
• A group must contain at least one destination.
• A group name must be specified for a group. No two groups can have the same group name.
• A single destination can be included in more than one group.
Modifying groups
This section describes how to modify registered groups.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the group you want to modify from the [User
List:], and then click [Edit].
2. To add a destination to the group, select the destination you want to add from [User List:]
and click [Add].
3. To delete a destination from the group, select the destination you want to delete from [List
of Group Members:], and then click [Delete from List].
4. Click [OK].
• A message appears if the name you specified already exists in the LAN-Fax Address Book. Click
[OK] and register it under a different name.
Deleting individual destinations or groups
This section describes how to delete individual destinations or groups from the LAN-Fax Address Book.
230
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, select the destination you want to delete from [User
List:], and then click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
2. Click [Yes].
• A destination is automatically deleted from a group if that destination is deleted from the LAN-Fax
Address Book. If you are deleting the last destination from a group, a message asking you to
confirm the deletion appears. Click [OK] if you want to delete the group.
• Deleting a group does not delete the destinations it contains from the LAN-Fax Address Book.
Exporting/Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
This section describes how to export or import LAN-Fax Address Book data.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
Exporting LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be exported to a file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format.
Follow this procedure to export LAN-Fax Address Book data.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Export].
2. Navigate to the location to save the LAN-Fax Address Book data, specify a name for
the file, and then click [Save].
Importing LAN-Fax Address Book data
LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from files in CSV format. You can import address
book data from other applications if the data is saved as a CSV file.
Follow this procedure to import LAN-Fax Address Book data. To import address book data from
other applications, you must select the appropriate items to import.
1. Open the LAN-Fax Address Book, and then click [Import].
2. Select the file containing the address book data, and then click [Open].
A dialog box for selecting the items to import appears.
231
6. Using the Fax Function
3. For each field, select an appropriate item from the list.
Select [*empty*] for fields for which there is no data to import. Note that [*empty*] cannot
be selected for [Name] or [Fax].
4. Click [OK].
If a destination with the same name is found during the import process, select one of the
following operations:
• [Skip]: Skips the destination, and imports the remaining data.
• [Save as new User]: Imports the current destination as a separate destination under the
same name as an existing destination.
• [Save All as new User]: Imports the current and subsequent destinations as separate
destinations under the same names as existing destinations.
• [Overwrite]: Imports the destination, overwriting the data in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
• [Overwrite All]: Imports the current and subsequent destinations under the same names
as existing destinations, overwriting the data in the LAN-Fax Address Book.
• [Cancel]: Cancels the import operation.
If a destination does not contain a name, or invalid characters are used in the telephone
number or fax number, select one of the following operations:
• [Skip]: Skips the destination, and imports the remaining data.
• [Save]: Imports the destination as is.
• [Save All]: Imports the current and subsequent destinations as is.
• [Cancel]: Cancels the import operation.
• CSV files are exported using Unicode encoding.
• LAN-Fax Address Book data can be imported from CSV files whose character encoding is Unicode
or ASCII.
232
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
• Group data cannot be exported or imported.
• Up to 1000 destinations can be registered in the LAN-Fax Address Book. If this limit is exceeded
during importing, the remaining destinations will not be imported.
Basic Operation for Sending Faxes from a Computer
This section describes the basic operation for sending faxes from a computer.
You can select the destination from the LAN-Fax Address Book or enter the fax number directly. You can
send faxes to up to 100 destinations at one time.
• Before sending a fax, the machine stores all the fax data in memory. If the machine's memory
becomes full while storing this data, the fax transmission will be canceled. If this happens, lower the
resolution or reduce the number of pages and try again.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
1. Open the file you want to send.
2. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
3. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
If necessary, configure the transmission settings in the LAN-Fax driver's properties before clicking
[Print].
4. To specify a destination from the LAN-Fax Address Book, select a destination from [User
List:], and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
5. To directly enter a fax number, click the [Specify Destination] tab, enter a fax number (up
to 40 digits) in [Fax Number:], and then click [Add to List].
Repeat this step to add more destinations.
233
6. Using the Fax Function
6. If you want to attach a fax cover sheet, click [Edit Cover Sheet] on the [Specify
Destination] tab, and then select the [Attach a Cover Sheet] check box.
Edit the cover sheet as necessary, and then click [OK].
7. Click [Send].
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, "P" (pause), " ", " ", "-", and space.
• If necessary, insert a pause in a fax number. The machine pauses briefly before it dials the digits
following the pause. You can specify the length of the pause time in the [Pause Time] setting under
fax transmission settings.
• To use tone services on a pulse-dialing line, insert " " in a fax number. " " switches the dialing
mode from pulse to tone temporarily.
• To delete an entered destination, select the destination in the [Destination List:], and then click
[Delete from List].
• You can register the fax number you entered in the [Specify Destination] tab in the LAN-Fax
Address Book. Click [Save to Address Book] to open the dialog box for registering a destination.
• From the [View:] list, you can select the types of destinations to display.
• [All]: Displays all destinations.
• [Group]: Displays groups only.
• [User]: Displays individual destinations only.
• If sending faxes via LAN-Fax is restricted, you must enter a user code in the LAN-Fax driver's
property before sending a fax.
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must enable user authentication and enter a user name and
password in the LAN-Fax driver's properties before sending a fax job to the machine.
Canceling a fax
You can cancel sending a fax using either the machine's control panel or your computer, depending on
the status of the job.
234
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
Canceling while the machine is receiving a fax from the computer
Cancel the fax from the computer.
If the machine is shared by multiple computers, be careful not to cancel the fax of another user.
1. Double-click the printer icon on the task bar of your computer.
2. Select the print job you want to cancel, click the [Document] menu, and then click
[Cancel].
3. Click [Yes].
Canceling while sending a fax
Cancel the fax using the control panel.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the [Clear/Stop] key.
CMF135
Editing a Fax Cover Sheet
This section describes how to edit a fax cover sheet in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click [Print].
235
6. Using the Fax Function
3. Click the [Specify Destination] tab, and then click [Edit Cover Sheet].
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [Print].
Settings you can configure for the fax cover sheets
This section describes the settings you can configure for the fax cover sheets.
1
2
8
7
6
3
4
5
CMF128
1. Attach a Cover Sheet
Check this to send a fax with a cover sheet.
2. From
Enter the sender information. Items left blank will not appear on the cover sheet.
• Company:
Enter your company name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
• Department:
Enter your department name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
• Name:
Enter your name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
• Phone:
Enter your telephone number. Can contain up to 64 characters.
236
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
• FAX:
Enter your fax number. Can contain up to 64 characters.
3. Import Bitmap
Specify a bitmap image you want to show on the cover sheet. The image will be shown in the position as
follows: Left=180, Right=800, Top=50, Bottom=180 (pixel). If the image is larger than this area, excess part is
trimmed.
4. User Template
Select the template for the cover sheet. There are three templates.
5. Buttons
• Preview...
Click to preview the cover sheet before sending the fax.
• Clear All
Click to clear all information you entered.
• OK
Click to finish editing the fax cover sheet.
• Cancel
Click to discard the fax cover sheet.
6. Comment
Enter a comment for the fax. Can contain up to 256 characters.
7. Subject
Enter the subject of the fax. Can contain up to 64 characters.
8. To
Enter the destination information. Items left blank will not appear on the cover sheet.
• Company:
Enter the destination company name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
• Department:
Enter the destination department name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
• Name:
Enter the destination name. Can contain up to 64 characters.
Configuring Transmission Settings
This section describes how to configure transmission settings in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.
Properties are set separately for each application.
1. On the [File] menu, click [Print...].
237
6. Using the Fax Function
2. Select the LAN-Fax driver as the printer, and then click a button such as [Preferences] or
[Properties] to open the driver's properties.
LAN-Fax driver properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the [Setup] tab.
4. Configure settings as necessary, and then click [OK].
Settings you can configure in the LAN-Fax driver's properties
This section describes the settings you can configure in the LAN-Fax driver's properties.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CMF129
1. Paper Size
Specifies the paper size.
• Document Size
Specifies the paper size of the document you are sending. If a paper size is specified in the application,
that paper size will be used. Otherwise, the paper size specified here will be used.
• Sending Size:
Displays the actual paper size of the fax that is sent. The actual size of the fax will be A4, if the size of
the document being faxed is A3, B4, or smaller than A4. A3/B4 documents will be reduced to sending
size automatically.
238
Using the Fax Function from a Computer (LAN-Fax)
2. Orientation
Specifies the page orientation.
3. Resolution
Specifies the resolution.
• Standard
Select this for a document with normal-sized characters.
• Fine
Select this for a document with small print.
• Photo
Select this for a document with images such as photographs or shaded drawings.
4. User Code
If sending faxes via LAN-Fax is restricted, select this check box and enter a user code before sending a fax.
5. Authentication
If LDAP authentication is specified, click this button to enable user authentication and enter a user name and
password before sending a fax job to the machine.
6. About...
Displays the version of the LAN-Fax driver.
7. Restore Defaults
Restores the settings to their factory defaults.
• The settings configured here are applicable for the current application only.
239
6. Using the Fax Function
Receiving a Fax
This section describes fax reception functions.
• When receiving an important fax, we recommend you confirm the contents of the received fax with
the sender.
• The machine may not be able to receive faxes when the amount of free memory space is low.
• An external telephone is required to use this machine as a telephone.
• Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes.
Selecting Reception Mode
This section describes how to select the reception mode.
The reception modes are as follows:
When using the machine only as a fax machine
Select the following mode when no external telephone or telephone answering device is
connected:
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the machine is used only as a fax machine and receives faxes automatically.
When using the machine with an external device
Select one of the following modes when an external telephone or telephone answering device is
connected:
• FAX/TEL Manual mode (manual reception)
In this mode, you must answer calls with an external telephone. If a call is a fax call, you have
to start the fax reception manually.
• Fax Only mode (auto reception)
In this mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.
• FAX/TEL Automatic mode (auto reception)
In this mode, you can answer phone calls with an external telephone and receive faxes
automatically.
• FAX/TAD mode (auto reception)
240
Receiving a Fax
In this mode, you can use the machine with an external telephone answering device.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Switch Reception Mode], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys to select the desired reception mode, and then press the [OK]
key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• In FAX/TAD mode, the machine automatically starts to receive faxes after the external telephone
answering device rings the number of times specified in [Total No. of Rings (TAD)] under [Fax
Features]. Make sure to set the external telephone answering device to answer calls before the
machine starts to receive faxes.
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Manual mode
This section describes the basic operation for receiving a fax when the reception mode is set to FAX/TEL
Manual mode.
1. Pick up the handset of the external telephone to answer the call.
A normal telephone call starts.
2. When you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, press the [Facsimile] key, and then press
the [Start] key.
3. Press [RX].
241
6. Using the Fax Function
4. Press the [Start] key.
5. Replace the handset.
Receiving a fax in Fax Only mode
When the reception mode is set to Fax Only mode, the machine automatically answers all incoming
calls in fax reception mode.
• You can specify the number of times the machine rings before answering a call in the [Number of
Rings] setting under [Fax Features].
• If you answer a call with the external telephone while the machine is ringing, a normal telephone
call starts. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually.
Receiving a fax in FAX/TEL Automatic mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TEL Automatic mode, the machine receives a fax automatically
if the incoming call is a fax call and rings when it receives voice calls.
1. When there is an incoming call, the machine tries to detect a fax calling tone for five seconds.
If a fax calling tone is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax automatically.
2. If a fax calling tone is not detected, the machine starts to ring, and continues to try to detect a fax
calling tone for the period of time specified in [RX Mode Auto Switch Time] under [Fax Features].
• If a fax calling tone is detected, or if you do not pick up the handset, the machine starts to
receive the fax automatically.
• To start a normal telephone call, pick up the handset, press the [Facsimile] key, and then press
the [Clear/Stop] key. If you hear a fax calling tone or no sound, receive the fax manually.
• If you pick up the handset but the time specified in [RX Mode Auto Switch Time] passes before
a normal telephone call starts, the machine starts to receive the fax automatically.
• After you pick up the handset to answer a call, make sure to press the [Facsimile] key to activate
fax mode before pressing the [Clear/Stop] key. If the machine is not in fax mode, pressing the
[Clear/Stop] key will not let you start a normal telephone call.
242
Receiving a Fax
Receiving a fax in FAX/TAD mode
When the reception mode is set to FAX/TAD mode, the external telephone answering device answers
and records messages when the machine receives telephone calls. If the incoming call is a fax call, the
machine receives the fax automatically.
1. When there is an incoming call, the external telephone answering device rings the number of times
specified in [Total No. of Rings (TAD)] under [Fax Features].
If the external telephone answering device does not answer, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
2. If the external telephone answering device answers, the machine monitors silence on the line for 30
seconds (silence detection).
• If a fax calling tone or no sound is detected, the machine starts to receive the fax
automatically.
• If a voice is detected, a normal telephone call starts. The external telephone answering device
records messages.
• You can manually receive a fax during silence detection.
• Silence detection does not terminate for 30 seconds even if the external telephone answering
device goes on-hook, unless you press the [Clear/Stop] key and disconnect the call.
Receiving an Internet Fax
You can set the machine to periodically check for e-mails (Internet Faxes) and receive them
automatically, or you can manually check and receive them.
• Specify the e-mail address of this machine for receiving Internet Faxes in [User Account] under
POP3 settings of Web Image Monitor.
• This machine may not be able to receive e-mails in HTML format.
Automatic reception
When [Automatic POP] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image Monitor is enabled, the machine
periodically connects to the POP3 server, as specified in [POP Interval (minutes)], to check for new
e-mails. The machine will download them if there are any.
243
6. Using the Fax Function
Manual reception
When [Automatic POP] is disabled, use the control panel to manually connect to the POP3 server
and check for new e-mails.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Reception Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Manual POP], and then press the [OK] key.
5. In the confirmation screen, press [Yes].
The machine checks for new e-mails and downloads them if there is any.
• If the e-mail reception fails and [Error Notification E-mail] under Internet Fax settings of Web Image
Monitor is enabled, an error notification e-mail will be sent to the original sender.
• If [Error Notification E-mail] is disabled or the error notification e-mail failed, the machine will print
out an error report.
Forwarding or Storing Faxes in Memory
To prevent unauthorized users from seeing sensitive faxes, you can set the machine to forward received
faxes to a preset destination, or store them in memory without printing them out.
Configuring the forwarding conditions
To specify the forwarding conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Select [Forward] for [Reception File Setting] under fax feature settings to forward received faxes.
244
Receiving a Fax
2. Configure what to do after forwarding in [Print Forwarded File] under fax feature settings:
• [On]: Store the faxes in memory for printing.
• [Off]: Delete the faxes from memory.
3. Configure the print setting for faxes stored in memory in [Print Received File] under fax feature
settings.
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing.
4. Configure the e-mail notification setting [Notify Forward Status] under fax feature settings:
• [Active]: Send an e-mail notification after forwarding. E-mail notification destination depends
on how the forwarding destination is configured.
• [Inactive]: An e-mail notification is not sent.
5. Specify the forwarding destination in [Forwarding Destination] under fax settings using Web Image
Monitor.
• The table below shows what happens after forwarding succeeds or fails depending on the
machine’s configuration.
Forwardi
ng
[Print
Forwarded
File]
[Print
Received
File]
Results
Not
applicable
The machine deletes the fax from memory.
Success
Success
Success
Failure
Failure
Off
On
On
Off
On
The machine prints out the fax and deletes it from
memory.
On
The machine stores the fax in memory for later
manual printing.
Off
Not
The machine prints out a forwarding failure report
applicable and deletes the fax from memory.
The machine prints out a forwarding failure report,
prints out the fax, and then deletes it from memory.
On
Off
The machine prints out a forwarding failure report
and stores the fax in memory for later manual
printing.
Failure
On
245
6. Using the Fax Function
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.
• The number of forwarding attempts and the attempt interval time can be specified using Web
Image Monitor.
Configuring the storing conditions
To specify the storing conditions for received faxes, configure the machine as follows:
1. Select [Print] for [Reception File Setting] under fax feature settings to store received faxes in
memory for printing.
2. Configure the print setting for faxes stored in memory in [Print Received File] under fax feature
settings.
• [On]: Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.
• [Off]: Store the received faxes in memory for later manual printing.
• When the fax is successfully printed out, it will be deleted from memory.
• If the machine is unable to print out a fax due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a
paper jam, the fax will remain in memory and the Fax Received indicator will flash. The remaining
pages will start printing as soon as the problem is resolved.
Printing Out Faxes Stored in Memory
This section describes how to print out received faxes stored in the machine’s memory.
246
Receiving a Fax
• If the machine remains turned off for a certain period of time (for example, when the power switch
is turned off or when there is a power failure), all documents stored in memory will be lost. If the
Fax Received indicator is lit or flashing, make sure to print out the stored documents before turning
off the power (for example, prior to relocating the machine).
When the Fax Received indicator is lit, there is a fax stored in machine's memory. Follow the procedure
below to print the fax.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key, and then press [RX File].
CMF133
Alternatively, you can press the [Shortcut to Func.] key if [Shortcut to Function] under administrator
settings is set to [Fax Auto Print Setting].
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [On], and then press the [OK] key.
The machine prints out the stored fax and deletes it from memory.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• Selecting [On] here will enable [Print Received File] under fax feature settings. If you do not want to
print out subsequent faxes automatically, set it back to [Off].
• If tray 2 is installed, you can select which tray to feed paper from in [Select Paper Tray] under fax
feature settings. If you set the machine to switch between tray 1 and 2 automatically in this setting,
you can also specify the tray the machine uses first in [Paper Tray Priority] under system settings.
• If the Fax Received indicator is flashing, there is a received fax in the machine's memory that could
not be printed out due to machine errors such as an empty paper tray or a paper jam. The printing
will start as soon as the problem is resolved.
247
6. Using the Fax Function
Receiving or Rejecting Faxes from Special Senders
You can set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the registered Special Senders. This helps
you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.
To use this function, you must first register Special Senders using Web Image Monitor, and then select
whether to accept or reject faxes from them.
• This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Registering the Special Senders
This section describes how to register Special Senders.
A maximum of 30 Special Senders can be registered.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [Special Sender].
3. From the [Destination Type] list, select [Special Sender].
4. Select the Special Sender number from the list (1 to 30).
5. Enter the Special Sender’s fax number (up to 20 characters).
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
248
Receiving a Fax
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
• A fax number can contain 0 to 9, “ ”, and space.
Limiting the incoming faxes
This section describes how to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed
Special Senders.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [System Settings].
3. Click the [Fax] tab.
4. For [Authorized Reception], click [Active].
5. For [Receive Conditions], click [Special Sender] or [Other Than Special Sender].
• Special Sender
Select this to receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other senders.
• Other Than Special Sender
Select this to reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other senders.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [OK].
8. Close the Web browser.
249
6. Using the Fax Function
When the Machine Prints a Power Failure
Report
If the power supply for this machine is cut off while sending or receiving a fax (due to a power failure,
etc.), the fax communication will fail. Also, if the machine remains turned off for about an hour, all
documents stored in memory will be lost.
If there was a fax transmission or reception failure, or any fax was lost from the memory, the machine
prints a power failure report as soon as the power is restored. The report can be used to identify such
faxes.
If there was a fax that was not sent, send it again.
If there was a fax that was not received, request the sender to send it again.
• After the power failure report is printed, keep the machine turned on for about 24 hours to
recharge its internal battery. With the battery fully charged, the machine is able to maintain faxes
stored in the memory for about one hour in the event of another power failure.
250
7. Configuring the Machine Using the
Control Panel
This chapter describes how to configure and adjust the machine's operational settings using the control
panel.
The machine can be operated using its default, but the configuration can be changed depending on the
needs of the user. Changes to settings are stored even if the machine is turned off.
Basic Operation Using the Menu Screen
This section describes the basic procedure for specifying and changing the machine's settings.
If you want to configure the machine's system settings, press the [User Tools] key. If you want to
configure the settings of machine's current operation mode, press the [ ][ ] keys.
The procedure for changing the copy quality setting is provided as an example.
1. Press the [Copy] key.
CMF131
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys.
CMF144
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Original Type], and then press the [OK] key.
251
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the document type of the original, and then press the [OK]
key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
• If LDAP authentication is specified, you must first log in to the machine by entering a user name and
password.
252
Menu Chart
Menu Chart
This section lists the parameters included in each menu.
• Some items might not appear depending on the model type or machine's configuration.
• Some items can also be configured using Web Image Monitor.
Copy Settings ([ ][ ] key setting)
Select Paper
Sort
Original Type
Density
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex/Combine
Scan Settings ([ ][ ] key setting)
Scan Size
Scanning Mode
Max. E-mail Size
Density
Resolution
Compression (Colour)
Limitless Scan
File Type
Original
Fax Transmission Settings ([ ][ ] key setting)
Immediate TX
Resolution
Density
253
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Pause Time
Auto Redial
Print Fax Header
Original
Fax Feature Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
Reception Settings
Select Paper Tray
Delete TX Standby File
Communication Settings
Report Print Settings
Fax Address Book Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
Quick Dial Dest.
Fax Speed Dial Dest.
System Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
Adjust Sound Volume
Tray Paper Settings
I/O Timeout
Auto Continue
Toner Saving
Supplies Status
Scanner Carriage
Printer Registration
Scan Warm-up Time
Low Humidity Mode
Image Density
254
Menu Chart
Network Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
Ethernet
IPv4 Configuration
IPv6 Configuration
Printing Lists/Reports ([User Tools] key setting)
Configuration Page
Fax Journal
TX/RX Standby File List
Quick Dial Dest. List
Fax Speed Dial Dest. List
Scanner Dest. List
Scanner Journal
Maintenance Page
Special Sender List
Administrator Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
Set Date/Time
Program Fax Information
Dial/Push Phone
PSTN / PBX
PBX Access Number
Function Priority
System Auto Reset Timer
Energy Saver Mode
Language
Country
Reset Settings
255
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Shortcut to Function
Admin. Tools Lock
IPsec
Fax Number Confirmation
Save Scn Data to USB
Printer Feature Settings ([User Tools] key setting)
List/Test Print
System
PCL Menu
PS Menu
256
Copy Settings
Copy Settings
This section describes how to configure the copy settings.
Changing Copy Settings
The procedure for changing the sort copy setting is provided as an example.
1. Press the [Copy] key.
CMF131
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys.
CMF144
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Sort], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [On] or [Off], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
257
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Copy Setting Parameters
This section describes the copy setting parameters.
Select Paper
Specifies the paper size used for printing copies.
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only.
When a paper size is selected, the machine checks the trays for the paper of the specified size in
the order of priority as set in [Paper Tray Priority] under system settings.
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing; when
that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
[Tray 2] appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Default: [Tray 1]
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
• A4
• 8 1/2 × 11
Sort
Configures the machine to sort the output pages into sets when making multiple copies of a multi-
page document (P1, P2, P1, P2...).
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Original Type
Specifies the content of originals, to optimize copy quality.
Default: [Mixed]
• Mixed
Select this when the original contains both text and photographs or pictures.
• Text
Select this when the original contains only text and no photographs or pictures.
• Photo
Select this when the original contains photographs or pictures. Use this mode for the following
types of original:
• Photographs
258
Copy Settings
• Pages that are entirely or mainly photographs or pictures, such as magazine pages.
Density
Specifies the image density for photocopying.
Default:
•
(Lightest)
•
•
•
•
(Darkest)
Reduce/Enlarge
Specifies the percentage by which copies are enlarged or reduced. Also, ID card copying can be
specified.
Default: [100%]
• 50%
• 65% (
model only)
model only)
model only)
model only)
• 71% (
• 78% (
• 82% (
• 93%
• 100%
• 122% (
• 129% (
• 141% (
• 155% (
• 200%
• 400%
• ID Card Copy
model only)
model only)
model only)
model only)
Sets the machine to copy the front and back sides of an ID card, or other small document,
onto the front of a single sheet of paper.
Note that enabling this setting automatically disables combined/2-sided copying.
• Zoom 25-400%
259
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Duplex/Combine
Specifies combined/2-sided copying. Select a copy mode according to your original and how
Note that enabling combined/2-sided copying automatically disables ID card copying.
Default: [Off]
• Off
• 1Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd
Copy will be made on 1 side, on which 2 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait
• Landscape
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd
Copy will be made on 1 side, on which 4 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: L to R
• Portrait: T to B
• Landscape: L to R
• Landscape: T to B
• 1 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 1 page of 1-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: T to T
• Portrait: T to B
• Landscape: T to T
• Landscape: T to B
• 1Sd 4Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 2 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: T to T
• Portrait: T to B
• Landscape: T to T
• Landscape: T to B
• 1Sd8Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 4 pages of 1-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: L to R, T to T
• Portrait: L to R, T to B
• Portrait: T to B, T to T
260
Copy Settings
• Portrait: T to B, T to B
• Landscape: L to R, T to T
• Landscape: L to R, T to B
• Landscape: T to B, T to T
• Landscape: T to B, T to B
• 2Sd 1Orig->Comb 2on1 1Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 1 side, on each of which 2 pages of 2-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: T to T
• Portrait: T to B
• Landscape: T to T
• Landscape: T to B
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 4on1 1Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 1 side, on each of which 4 pages of 2-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: L to R, T to T
• Portrait: L to R, T to B
• Portrait: T to B, T to T
• Portrait: T to B, T to B
• Landscape: L to R, T to T
• Landscape: L to R, T to B
• Landscape: T to B, T to T
• Landscape: T to B, T to B
• 2 Sided Orig->2 Sided Copy (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 2 pages of 2-sided original will be printed.
• 2Sd 2Orig->Comb 2on1 2Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 2 pages of 2-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: T to T
• Portrait: T to B
• Landscape: T to T
• Landscape: T to B
• 2Sd 4Orig->Comb 4on1 2Sd (Type 2 model only)
Copy will be made on 2 sides, on each of which 4 pages of 2-sided original will be printed.
• Portrait: L to R, T to T
• Portrait: L to R, T to B
261
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Portrait: T to B, T to T
• Portrait: T to B, T to B
• Landscape: L to R, T to T
• Landscape: L to R, T to B
• Landscape: T to B, T to T
• Landscape: T to B, T to B
• Manual 2 Sided Scan Mode
Enables the machine to scan both sides of an original and make a 2-sided copy using the
exposure glass. When this setting is enabled, you will be asked to turn over the original on the
exposure glass after scanning one side is complete.
This setting is only available with the Type 2 model.
262
Scanner Settings
Scanner Settings
This section describes how to configure the scanner settings.
Changing Scanner Settings
The procedure for changing the file type setting is provided as an example.
1. Press the [Scanner] key.
CMF132
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys.
CMF144
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [File Type], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Multi-page] or [Single Page], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
263
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Scanner Setting Parameters
This section describes the scanner setting parameters.
Scan Size
Specifies the scanning size according to the size of the original.
Default:
• 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 8 1/2 × 5 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, A4, B5, A5, Custom Size
Scanning Mode
[A4],
[8 1/2 × 11]
Specifies the scanning mode using the control panel.
Default: [Colour]
• B&W
The machine creates 1-bit black-and-white images. Images contain only black and white
colors.
• Colour
The machine creates 8-bit color images. Images are full color.
• Grey Scale
The machine creates 8-bit black-and-white images. Images contain black and white, and
intermediate gray colors.
Max. E-mail Size
Specifies the maximum size of a file that can be sent by e-mail.
Default: [1 MB]
• 1 MB
• 2 MB
• 3 MB
• 4 MB
• 5 MB
• No Limit
Density
Specifies the image density for scanning originals.
Default:
•
•
•
•
(Lightest)
264
Scanner Settings
•
(Darkest)
Resolution
Specifies the resolution for scanning the original.
Default: [300 × 300dpi]
• 100 × 100dpi
• 150 × 150dpi
• 200 × 200dpi
• 300 × 300dpi
• 400 × 400dpi
• 600 × 600dpi
Compression (Colour)
Specifies the color compression ratio for JPEG files. The lower the compression ratio, the higher the
quality but greater the file size.
Default: [Medium]
• Low
• Medium
• High
Limitless Scan
Sets the machine to request next originals when scanning with the exposure glass.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
File Type
Specifies whether to create a multi-page file containing all pages or separate single-page files
when scanning multiple pages.
Note that a scanned file can contain multiple pages only when the file format is PDF or TIFF. If the
file format is JPEG, a single-page file is created for each scanned page.
Default: [Multi-page]
• Multi-page
• Single Page
Original
Sets the machine to scan both sides of original automatically when using the ARDF.
When using this function, specify the page and binding orientations according to those of the
originals.
265
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
This setting appears only for the Type 2 model.
Default: [1 Sided]
• 1 Sided
• 2 Sided Portrait: T to T
• 2 Sided Portrait: T to B
• 2 Sided Landscape: T to T
• 2 Sided Landscape: T to B
266
Fax Transmission Settings
Fax Transmission Settings
This section describes how to configure the fax transmission settings.
Changing Fax Transmission Settings
The procedure for setting the resolution for scanning the original is provided as an example.
1. Press the [Facsimile] key.
CMF133
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys.
CMF144
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Resolution], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired resolution, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
267
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Fax Transmission Setting Parameters
This section describes fax transmission setting parameters.
Immediate TX
Sets the machine to send a fax immediately when the original is scanned.
Default: [Off]
• Off
Select this when using Memory Transmission.
• On
Select this when using Immediate Transmission.
• Next Fax Only
Select this when using Immediate Transmission for the next transmission only.
Resolution
Specifies the resolution to use for scanning originals.
The "Photo" resolution is not available for Internet Faxes. Faxes will be sent using "Detail" resolution
if "Photo" resolution has been specified.
Default: [Standard]
• Standard
Select this when the original is a printed or typewritten document with normal-sized
characters.
• Detail
Select this when the original is a document with small print.
• Photo
Select this when the original contains images such as photographs or shaded drawings.
Density
Specifies the image density to use for scanning originals.
Default: [Normal]
• Light
• Normal
• Dark
Pause Time
Specifies the length of pause time when a pause is inserted between the digits of a fax number.
Default: 3 seconds
• 1 to 15 seconds
268
Fax Transmission Settings
Auto Redial
Sets the machine to redial the fax destination automatically when the line is busy or a transmission
error occurs, if the machine is in Memory Transmission mode. The number of redial attempts is
preset to two or three times, depending on the [Country] setting under [Admin. Tools], in five-minute
intervals.
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
Print Fax Header
Sets the machine to add a header to every fax you send. The header includes the current date and
time, user fax name and fax number of the machine, job ID, and page information.
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
Original
Specifies the sides of the original (1 side or 2-sides) for scanning when using the ARDF in Memory
Transmission mode.
When scanning 2-sides of original, specify the page and binding orientations according to those of
the originals.
This setting only appears when the machine is in Memory Transmission mode for the Type 2 model.
Default: [1 Sided]
• 1 Sided
• 2 Sided Portrait: T to T
• 2 Sided Portrait: T to B
• 2 Sided Landscape: T to T
• 2 Sided Landscape: T to B
269
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Fax Feature Settings
This section describes how to configure the fax feature settings.
Changing Fax Feature Settings
The procedure for setting the tray for printing faxes is provided as an example.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Fax Features], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Select Paper Tray], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired tray, and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Fax Feature Setting Parameters
This section describes fax feature setting parameters.
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
Reception Settings
Specifies the settings for receiving a fax.
• Switch Reception Mode
Specifies the reception mode.
Default: [Fax Only]
270
Fax Feature Settings
• Fax Only
The machine automatically answers all incoming calls in fax reception mode.
• FAX/TEL(Mnl.)
The machine rings when it receives incoming calls. The machine receives faxes only
when you manually receive faxes.
• FAX/TAD
The machine receives faxes automatically when a fax call is received. Otherwise, the
connected telephone answering device answers the call.
• FAX/TEL(Auto)
The machine receives faxes automatically when a fax call is received. Otherwise, the
machine starts to ring.
• Total No. of Rings (TAD)
Specifies the number of times the external telephone answering device rings before the
machine starts to receive faxes in FAX/TAD mode.
Default: 5 times
• 1 to 20 times, in increments of 1
• Auto Reduction
Sets the machine to reduce the size of a received fax if it is too large to print on a single sheet
of paper.
Note that the machine only reduces the size down to 74%. If further reduction is required to fit
the fax on a single sheet, it will be printed on separate sheets without being reduced.
Default: [On]
(Default may be [Off] depending on the [Country] setting under [Admin. Tools].)
• Off
• On
• Number of Rings
Specifies the number of times the machine rings before it starts to receive faxes in Fax Only
mode.
Default: 3 times
• 3 to 5 times
• RX Mode Auto Switch Time
Specifies the length of time the machine tries to detect the fax calling tone in FAX/TEL
Automatic mode.
Default: 15 seconds
• 5 to 99 seconds
271
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Authorized Reception
Sets the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from the programmed Special Senders. This
helps you screen out unwanted documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of
fax paper.
Default: [Inactive]
• Active
• Inactive
• Auth.RX: Receive Conditions
Specifies whether to receive or reject faxes from the programmed Special Senders.
This setting is available when [Authorized Reception] is enabled.
Default: [Special Sender]
• Special Sender
Receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other senders.
• Other Than Special Sender
Reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other senders.
• Reception File Setting
Sets the machine to store received faxes into memory for printing or forward them to a preset
destination.
Default: [Print]
• Print
• Forward
• Print Received File
Sets the machine to automatically print the faxes received into memory or store them for later
manual printing.
Default: [On]
• On
Automatically print out the received faxes and delete from memory.
• Off
Store the received faxes in memory for manual printing.
• Print Forwarded File
Sets the machine to store the faxes in memory for printing or delete them after forwarding.
Default: [Off]
272
Fax Feature Settings
• On
Store the faxes in memory for printing after forwarding.
• Off
Delete the faxes from memory after forwarding.
• Notify Forward Status
Sets the machine to send e-mail notifications after faxes are forwarded. The e-mail notification
destination depends on how the forwarding destination is configured using Web Image
Default: [Inactive]
• Active
• Inactive
• Manual POP
Connects to the POP3 server to receive e-mail messages manually.
Press [Yes] to connect to the POP3 server and receive e-mail messages. Press [No] to exit to
the previous level of the menu tree without connecting to the POP3 server.
Select Paper Tray
Specifies the tray for printing received faxes. Note that only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be
used for printing faxes. Make sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.
If tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.
Default: [Auto]
• Auto
The machine uses tray 1 and tray 2 if they contain paper of the same size. In this case, the
machine starts to print from the tray specified as the priority tray in [Paper Tray Priority] under
system settings. If that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other
tray to continue printing.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
Delete TX Standby File
Deletes unsent fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory. The machine can store up to 5 unsent
fax jobs.
This function is only performed when selected.
• Delete Selected File
To delete a fax job, select the desired job, and then select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the
previous level of the menu tree without deleting the fax job.
• Delete All Files
273
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
To delete the fax jobs, select [Yes]. Selecting [No] exits to the previous level of the menu tree
without deleting the fax job.
Communication Settings
• ECM Transmission
Sets the machine to automatically resend parts of the data that are lost during transmission.
This function is not available with Internet Fax transmission.
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
• ECM Reception
Sets the machine to automatically receive parts of the data that are lost during reception.
This function is not available with Internet Fax reception.
Default: [On]
• Off
• On
• Dial Tone Detect
Sets the machine to detect a dial tone before the machine begins to dial the destination
automatically.
Default: [Detect]
• Detect
• Not Detect
• Transmission Speed
Specifies the transmission speed for the fax modem.
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
• 33.6 Kbps
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
• Reception Speed
Specifies the reception speed for the fax modem.
Default: [33.6 Kbps]
• 33.6 Kbps
274
Fax Feature Settings
• 14.4 Kbps
• 9.6 Kbps
• 7.2 Kbps
• 4.8 Kbps
• 2.4 Kbps
• JBIG
Enables transmission and reception of JBIG-compressed images, which require less
communication time than MMR-/MR-/MH-compressed images.
Note that to use this function, [ECM Transmission] and [ECM Reception] must also be
enabled.
This function is not available with Internet Fax.
Default: [Active]
• Active
• Inactive
Report Print Settings
• Print TX Status Report
Sets the machine to print a transmission report automatically after a fax transmission.
When the machine is in Immediate Transmission mode, the image of the original will not be
reproduced on the report, even if [Error Only (Image Attached)] or [Every TX (Image
Attached)] is selected.
Note that if a memory error occurs for LAN-Fax transmission, a transmission report will always
be printed regardless of this setting.
The transmission report will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Default: [Every TX (Image Attached)]
• Error Only
Prints a report when a transmission error occurs.
• Error Only (Image Attached)
Prints a report with an image of the original when transmission error occurs.
• Every TX
Prints a report for every fax transmission.
• Every TX (Image Attached)
Prints a report with an image of the original for every fax transmission.
• Do not Print
• Print Fax Journal
275
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Sets the machine to print a fax journal automatically for every 50 fax jobs (both sent and
received).
The fax journal will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
Default: [Auto Print]
• Auto Print
• Do not Auto Print
276
Fax Address Book Settings
Fax Address Book Settings
This section describes the fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial settings.
Registering Fax Destinations in Fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial
Register fax destinations in the Address Book using this menu.
• A password for accessing the [Address Book] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
Fax Address Book Parameters
Quick Dial Dest.
Specifies the fax number and name for Quick Dial entries. You can register up to 20 Quick Dial
entries.
• No.
Specifies the Quick Dial number.
• Fax No.
Specifies the fax number for Quick Dial entries. The fax number can contain up to 40
characters, including 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• Name
Specifies the name for Quick Dial entries. The name can contain up to 20 characters.
Fax Speed Dial Dest.
Specifies the fax number and name for Speed Dial entries. You can register up to 200 Speed Dial
entries.
• No.
Specifies the Speed Dial number.
• Fax No.
Specifies the fax number for Speed Dial entries. The fax number can contain up to 40
characters, including 0 to 9, pause, " ", " ", and space.
• Name
277
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Specifies the name for Speed Dial entries. The name can contain up to 20 characters.
278
System Settings
System Settings
This section describes the machine's operational settings.
Changing System Settings
The procedure for changing the volume of the panel key sound is provided as an example.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [System Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Adjust Sound Volume], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Panel Key Sound], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to change the volume, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
System Setting Parameters
This section describes the system setting parameters.
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
Adjust Sound Volume
Specifies the volume of the sounds produced by the machine.
Default: [Low] for [Panel Key Sound], and [Middle] for other parameters.
• Panel Key Sound
279
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
• Ring Volume
Specifies the volume of the ring when a call is received.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
• On Hook Mode
Specifies the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
• Job End Tone
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
• Job Error Tone
Specifies the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error occurs.
• Off
• Low
• Middle
• High
• Alarm Volume
Specifies the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs.
• Off
• Low
280
System Settings
• Middle
• High
Tray Paper Settings
• Paper Type: Tray 1
Specifies the paper type for tray 1.
Default: [Plain Paper]
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Colour Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Thick Paper 1, Thick Paper 2
• Paper Type: Tray 2
Specifies the paper type for tray 2.
This setting appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Default: [Plain Paper]
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Colour Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Thick Paper 1
• Paper Type: Bypass Tray
Specifies the paper type for bypass tray.
Default: [Plain Paper]
Thin Paper, Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Colour Paper, Letterhead, Preprinted Paper,
Prepunched Paper, Label Paper, Bond Paper, Cardstock, Envelope, Thick Paper 1, Thick
Paper 2, OHP
• Paper Size: Tray 1
Specifies the paper size for tray 1.
Default:
[A4],
[8 1/2 × 11]
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 ×
13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, Custom Size
• Paper Size: Tray 2
Specifies the paper size for tray 2.
This setting appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Default:
[A4],
[8 1/2 × 11]
A4, 8 1/2 × 11, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 × 14, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
• Paper Size: Bypass Tray
Specifies the paper size for bypass tray.
Default:
[A4],
[8 1/2 × 11]
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10 1/2,
16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL Env, Custom Size
281
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Bypass Tray Priority
Specifies how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.
Default: [Machine Setting(s)]
• Machine Setting(s)
The machine prints all print jobs according to the machine’s settings.
An error will occur if the paper size/type settings of the machine and printer driver do
not match.
• Any Size/Type
The machine prints all print jobs according to the printer driver’s settings.
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine and printer driver
do not match. However, if the paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will
be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer driver’s settings and
prints standard size print jobs according to the machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the
machine and printer driver do not match. However, if the paper is too small for the print
job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type settings of the
machine and printer driver do not match.
• Paper Tray Priority
Specifies the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for the job when a
tray is set to be selected automatically.
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the next tray to
continue printing.
[Tray 2] appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Default for all functions: [Tray 1]
• Printer
Select a tray to check first when automatic tray selection is specified for the print job.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
• Copier
Select a tray to check first when [A4] or [8 1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] under
copy settings.
282
System Settings
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
• Bypass Tray
• Facsimile
Select a tray to check first when [Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] under fax
feature settings.
• Tray 1
• Tray 2
I/O Timeout
• USB
Specifies how many seconds the machine waits for print data, if the data is interrupted while it
is being sent from the computer via USB. If the machine does not receive any more data within
the time specified here, the machine only prints the data it has received. If printing is frequently
interrupted by data from other ports, increase the timeout period.
Default: [60 sec.]
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
• Network
Specifies how many seconds the machine waits for print data, if the data is interrupted while it
is being sent from the computer via network. If the machine does not receive any more data
within the time specified here, the machine only prints the data it has received. If printing is
frequently interrupted by data from other ports, increase the timeout period.
Default: [60 sec.]
• 15 sec.
• 60 sec.
• 300 sec.
• Locked Print
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file, when the machine
cannot store any more Locked Print files. Within this time, you can print or delete the new
Locked Print file. You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
Default: 60 seconds
• 0 to 300 seconds
• Fixed USB Port
283
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for multiple machines or not
under USB connection.
Default: [Off]
• On
The same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have installed in your computer can be used with
any machine other than the one originally used for installation, if the machine is of the
same model.
• Off
You must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for individual machines, because
the machine other than the original will be recognized as a new device upon USB
connection.
Auto Continue
Sets the machine to ignore an error with paper size or type and continue printing. The printing stops
temporarily when an error is detected, and restarts automatically after about ten seconds using the
settings made on the control panel.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Toner Saving
Sets the machine to print using a reduced amount of toner (for prints made by the copier function
only).
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Supplies Status
Displays information about consumables. To replace the fusing unit, transfer roller, or paper feed
roller, contact your sales or service representative.
• Print Cart.:
Displays the remaining amount of toner.
(New),
(Needs replacing)
• Fusing Unit:
Displays the remaining life of the fusing unit.
(New),
(Needs replacing)
• Transfer Roller:
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
284
System Settings
Displays the remaining life of the transfer roller.
(New),
(Needs replacing)
• Paper Feed Roller
Displays the remaining life of the paper feed roller.
(New),
(Needs replacing)
Scanner Carriage
• Lock Scnr. Carriage
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Returns the scanning unit inside the machine to its original position. Before transporting the
machine, use this function to return the scanning unit to its original position.
Press [Yes] to return the scanning unit to its original position. Press [No] to exit to the previous
level of the menu tree without returning the scanning unit to its original position.
Printer Registration
Adjust the registration of each tray if necessary. You can adjust the registration value between -15
and +15 (that is, -1.5 and +1.5 mm, in 0.1 mm increments).
[Horiz.: Tray 2] and [Vert.: Tray 2] appear only when tray 2 is installed.
[Horiz.: Duplex: Back] and [Vert.: Duplex: Back] appear only for the Type 2 model.
Default: 0 for all parameters
• Horiz.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration horizontally.
• Vert.: Tray 1
Select this to adjust the tray 1 registration vertically.
• Horiz.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration horizontally.
• Vert.: Tray 2
Select this to adjust the tray 2 registration vertically.
• Horiz.: Bypass Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration horizontally.
• Vert.: Bypass Tray
Select this to adjust the bypass tray registration vertically.
• Horiz.: Duplex: Back
Select this to adjust the duplex back side registration horizontally.
• Vert.: Duplex: Back
285
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Select this to adjust the duplex back side registration vertically.
Scan Warm-up Time
If the machine is used in a room where the temperature is low, the machine may not be able to
scan originals clearly. Selecting [Long] for this setting may improve the scanning quality.
Default: [Normal]
• Normal
Select this if the room temperature is about 19 °C (66.2 °F) or higher.
• Long
Select this if the room temperature is about 18 °C (64.4 °F) or lower. This prolongs the warm-
up time for the machine's scanning unit by about 10 seconds.
Low Humidity Mode
If the machine is used in a room where humidity level is low, black lines of a few millimeters thick
may appear on printouts with 75-millimeter spaces in between. Selecting [On] for this setting may
prevent these lines from appearing (wait for about one day until this setting becomes effective).
Note that when this setting is enabled, the machine automatically performs self-maintenance in
every 10 minutes.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Image Density
Adjusts the density of images on prints.
Default: 0
• -3 to +3
286
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the network settings.
Changing Network Settings
The procedure for changing the network speed is provided as an example.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Network Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Ethernet], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Set Ethernet Speed], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the network speed, and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• A password for accessing the [Network Settings] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Network Setting Parameters
This section describes the network setting parameters.
Ethernet
• MAC Address
287
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Displays the machine's MAC address.
• Ethernet Speed
Displays the current Ethernet speed setting.
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
• Ethernet Unavailable
Appears when a network cable is not connected.
• Set Ethernet Speed
Specifies the speed for Ethernet communication. Select a speed that matches your network
environment.
For most networks, the default setting is the optimum setting.
Default: [Auto Select]
• Auto Select
• 100Mbps Full Duplex
• 100Mbps Half Duplex
• 10Mbps Full Duplex
• 10Mbps Half Duplex
IPv4 Configuration
• DHCP
Sets the machine to receive its IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway address
automatically from a DHCP server.
Default: [Active]
• Active
• Inactive
• IP Address
Specifies the machine's IPv4 address when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current IP address when DHCP is used.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.
• Subnet Mask
Specifies the machine's subnet mask when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current subnet mask when DHCP is used.
288
Network Settings
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.
• Gateway Address
Specifies the machine's default gateway address when DHCP is not used.
Use this menu to check the current default gateway address when DHCP is used.
Default: XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The numbers represented by "X" vary according to your network environment.
• IP Address Method
Displays the IP address acquisition method.
• DHCP
• Auto IP
• Manual Config.
• Default IP
IPv6 Configuration
• IPv6
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6.
Default: [Active]
• Active
• Inactive
• DHCP
Sets the machine to receive its IPv6 address from a DHCP server.
Default: [Inactive]
• Active
• Inactive
• IP Address (DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from a DHCP server.
• Manual Config. Address
• Manual Config. Address
Specifies the machine's IPv6 address when DHCP is not used. Can contain up to 39
characters.
• Prefix Length
Specifies the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.
289
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Gateway Address
Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. Can contain up to 39 characters.
• Stateless Address
Displays the IPv6 stateless addresses obtained from a Router Advertisement.
• Stateless Address 1
• Stateless Address 2
• Stateless Address 3
• Stateless Address 4
• Link-local Address
Displays the IPv6 link local address.
• Contact your network administrator for information about the network configuration.
290
Printing Lists/Reports
Printing Lists/Reports
This section describes the types of reports that can be printed.
Printing the Configuration Page
Follow the procedure below to print the configuration page.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Print List/Report], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Configuration Page], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
The configuration page is printed.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Types of Lists/Reports
Configuration Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
Fax Journal
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
TX/RX Standby File List
Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed, sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Dest. List
Prints a list of scan and fax Quick Dial entries.
291
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Fax Speed Dial Dest. List
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
• Sort by Speed Dial No.
Prints the list with the entries sorted by Speed Dial registration number.
• Sort by Name
Prints the list with the entries sorted by name.
Scanner Dest. List
Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and Scan to Folder
transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
Special Sender List
Prints a list of fax Special Senders.
• Repots will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
Reading the Configuration Page
System Reference
• Model Name
Shows the machine model name.
• Machine ID
Shows the serial number assigned to the machine by the manufacturer.
• Total Memory
Shows the total amount of memory installed on the machine.
• Bootloader Version
Shows the version of the machine's bootloader.
• Firmware Version
Shows the version of the machine's firmware.
292
Printing Lists/Reports
• Engine FW Version
Shows the version of firmware for the machine engine.
Paper Input
Information about tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
• Tray 1
Shows paper size and type settings.
• Tray 2
Shows paper size and type settings.
• Bypass Tray
Shows paper size and type settings.
• Tray Priority
Shows the fax, printer, and copy priority tray settings.
• Bypass Tray Priority
Shows the bypass tray priority settings.
Counter
Shows counter information.
• Total Counter
• Printer
• Scanner
• Facsimile
• Copier
• Duplex
Supplies Status
Shows information about supply levels.
• Print Cartridge
• Fusing Unit
• Paper Feed Roller
• Transfer Roller
System Settings
Shows the system settings.
Admin Tools
Shows the administrator settings.
293
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Copy Settings
Shows the copy settings.
Scan Settings
Shows the scanner settings.
Internet Fax (T.37)
Shows the Internet Fax settings.
• SMTP Server Address
• E-mail Address
• POP Server Address
• POP Account
• Admin. E-mail Address
• Automatic POP
• POP Interval
• Auth.(Internet Fax TX)
• Auth.(Internet Fax RX)
• Internet Fax TX
• Error Notification E-mail
• POP Server: E-mail Recept.Set.
• Insert System-fixed Text
Fax Features
Shows the fax settings.
Network Settings
Shows the settings for the following items:
• MAC Address
• Set Ethernet Speed
• TCP/IP
• SNMP
• E-mail
IPv6 Configuration
Shows the IPv6 settings.
• IPv6
• DHCP
• IP Address
294
Printing Lists/Reports
• Stateless Address
• Link-local Address
• Manual Address
• Prefix Length
• DNS Method
• Primary DNS Server
• Secondary DNS Server
• Domain Name
• Default Gateway
• Gateway (Manual Addr.)
LDAP Configuration
Shows the LDAP settings.
• LDAP Server Address 1
• LDAP Server Address 2
• LDAP Server Address 3
• LDAP Server Address 4
• LDAP Server Address 5
• Authentication
• Search Timeout
Reading the Fax Journal
No.
Shows the job number.
Date/Time
Shows the transmission start date and time for fax transmission.
Shows the reception date and time for fax reception.
Comm. Type
Shows the following information:
• TX: a fax was sent.
• RX: a fax was received.
• LAN-Fax: a fax was sent by LAN-Fax.
• I-Fax TX: a fax was sent via Internet Fax.
• I-Fax RX: a fax was received via Internet Fax.
295
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Forwarding: a fax was forwarded.
Duration
Shows the time taken for fax transmission or reception to complete.
Sender/Destination
For a received fax, shows the fax number registered by the sender or an e-mail address if the fax
was received via Internet Fax.
For a fax that was sent, shows the following information according to the transmission method:
• If an external telephone was used: shows the fax number registered by the receiving party.
• If a Quick Dial/Speed Dial was used: shows the name registered for the destination; if a
name was not programmed, shows the destination's fax number.
• If a fax number was input using the control panel number keys: shows the dialed fax number.
• If the fax was sent from the computer (LAN-Fax): shows the dialed fax number.
• If the fax was sent via Internet Fax: shows the destination e-mail address.
Pages
Shows the number of pages transmitted or received.
Results
Shows the result of a fax transmission or reception. If an error occurred during the fax
communication, shows an error code.
Reading the TX/RX Standby File List
No.
Shows the job number.
Date/Time
Shows the date and time at which a fax was stored in memory.
Type
Shows the following information:
• Redial: sending was done by automatic redial.
• Broadcast: sending was done by broadcast.
• LAN-Fax: sending was done by LAN-Fax.
• Forwarding: sending was done by forwarding.
• Memory TX: sending was done by any other method.
296
Printing Lists/Reports
• RX: a fax was received.
Sender/Destination
For a received fax, shows the fax number registered by the sender or an e-mail address if the fax
was received via Internet Fax.
For a fax that was sent, shows the following information according to the transmission method:
• If an external telephone was used: shows the fax number registered by the receiving party.
• If a Quick Dial/Speed Dial was used: shows the name registered for the destination; if a
name was not programmed, shows the destination's fax number.
• If a fax number was input using the control panel number keys: shows the dialed fax number.
• If the fax was sent from the computer (LAN-Fax): shows the dialed fax number.
• If the fax was sent via Internet Fax: shows the destination e-mail address.
Pages
Shows the number of pages a fax contained.
Reading the Scanner Journal
No.
Shows the job number.
Date
Shows the date of a transmission.
Time
Shows the time at which a transmission was completed.
Type
Shows the transmission method.
Destination
Shows the scan destination.
Files
Shows the number of files created.
Color
Shows the color mode in which the scanning was performed.
Format
Shows the file format.
Results
Shows whether the transmission successfully ended or failed.
297
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Administrator Settings
This section describes administrator settings.
Changing Administrator Settings
The procedure for changing the start-up mode after power-on is provided as an example.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Function Priority], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired mode, and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Administrator Setting Parameters
This section describes administrator setting parameters.
Set Date/Time
Sets the date and time of the machine’s internal clock.
• Set Date
298
Administrator Settings
Specifies the date of the machine’s internal clock.
Only dates that correspond with the year and month can be set. Incompatible dates will be
refused.
Default date format:
[Day/Month/Year],
[Month/Day/Year]
• Date format: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, or Year/Month/Day
Year: 2000 to 2099
Month: 1 to 12
Day: 1 to 31
• Set Time
Sets the time of the machine’s internal clock.
Default time format:
[24-hour Format],
[12-hour Format]
• Time format: 12-hour Format, 24-hour Format
AM/PM stamp: AM, PM (for 12-hour Format)
Hour: 0 to 23 (for 24-hour Format), or 1 to 12 (for 12-hour Format)
Minute: 0 to 59
Program Fax Information
Specifies the fax name and fax number of the machine.
• Number:
Specifies the fax number of the machine using up to 20 characters, including 0 to 9, space,
and "+".
• Name:
Specifies the fax name of the machine using up to 20 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Dial/Push Phone
Specifies the line type of the telephone line.
To configure this setting, contact your telephone company and select the setting based on your
telephone line. Selecting a wrong setting may cause failures in fax transmissions.
[Dial Phone (20PPS)] may not appear depending on the country setting of the machine.
Default: [Push Phone]
• Push Phone
• Dial Phone (10PPS)
• Dial Phone (20PPS)
PSTN / PBX
Sets the machine to connect to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or a private branch
exchange (PBX).
299
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Default: [PSTN]
• PSTN
• PBX
PBX Access Number
Specifies the dial number to access the outside line when the machine is connected to a PBX.
Make sure that this setting matches the setting of your PBX. Otherwise, you may not be able to send
faxes to outside destinations.
Default: 9
• 0 to 999
Function Priority
Specifies the mode that is activated when the power is turned on, or if the time specified for [System
Auto Reset Timer] elapses without activity while the initial screen of the current mode is displayed.
Default: [Copier]
• Copier
• Facsimile
• Scanner
System Auto Reset Timer
Sets the machine to return to the mode specified in [Function Priority].
Default: [On] (30 seconds)
• On (30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 3 min., 5 min., 10 min.)
• Off
Energy Saver Mode
Sets the machine to enter Energy Saver mode, Energy Saver mode 1 or Energy Saver mode 2, to
reduce power consumption. The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a
print job, prints a received fax, or when the [Copy] or [Start] key is pressed.
• EnergySaverMode 1
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 1 if the machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off state or Energy
Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy Saver mode 1 than in Energy
Saver mode 2.
Default: [Off]
• Off
• On (30 seconds)
• EnergySaverMode 2
300
Administrator Settings
The machine enters Energy Saver mode 2 after the period of time specified for this setting is
passed. The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy Saver
mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2 than from Energy Saver
mode 1.
Default: [On] (1 minute)
• On (1 to 240 minutes)
• Off
Language
Specifies the language used on the screen and in reports.
The default value for this setting is the language you have specified during the Initial Setup, which is
required after turning on the machine for the first time.
Country
Selects the country in which the machine is used. The country code you specify determines the time
and date display format and the default values of the fax transmission-related settings.
Make sure to select the country code correctly. Selecting a wrong country code may cause failures
in fax transmissions.
The default value for this setting is the country code you have specified during the Initial Setup,
which is required after turning on the machine for the first time.
Reset Settings
Be sure not to clear the settings by mistake.
• Reset All Settings
Resets the machine's settings to their defaults except the following:
• Network settings
• Fax destinations and Special Sender list
• [Printer Registration], [Low Humidity Mode], and [Image Density] settings under system
settings
• Scan destinations (configured using Web Image Monitor)
• User restriction settings (configured using Web Image Monitor)
• IPsec settings (configured using Web Image Monitor)
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing
the settings.
• Reset Network Settings
Resets the network settings to their defaults.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing
the settings.
• Clear Address Book
301
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Clears the fax Quick Dial/Speed Dial destinations and Special Sender list.
Press [Yes] to execute. Press [No] to exit to the previous level of the menu tree without clearing
the destinations.
Shortcut to Function
Assigns one of the following functions to the [Shortcut to Func.] key on the control panel.
Default: [ID Card Copy Mode]
• ID Card Copy Mode
• Fax Auto Print Setting
• Fax Immediate TX
• Select Scanner Dest.
• Dup/Comb Copy
Admin. Tools Lock
Specifies a four-digit password for accessing the [Address Book], [Network Settings], and [Admin.
Tools] menus.
Do not forget this password.
• On (0000 to 9999)
• Off
IPsec
Selects whether to enable or disable IPsec.
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].
Default: [Inactive]
• Active
• Inactive
Fax Number Confirmation
Sets the machine to require a fax number to be entered twice when specifying a destination
manually.
When this function is enabled, you cannot use the On Hook Dial function.
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
Save Scn Data to USB
Selects whether to enable or disable the Scan to USB function.
302
Administrator Settings
Note that if you change this setting while a USB flash disk is inserted in the machine, the change
will not take effect immediately. You must remove and re-insert the USB flash disk to make the
change effective.
This function appears only when a password is specified under [Admin. Tools Lock].
Default: [Active]
• Active
• Inactive
303
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Printer Feature Settings
This section describes the printer feature settings.
Changing Printer Feature Settings
The procedure for changing the setting for duplex printing is described as an example.
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Printer Features], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [System], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Duplex], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [None], [Long Edge Bind], or [Short Edge Bind], and then
press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
Printer Feature Setting Parameters
This section describes the printer feature setting parameters.
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
List/Test Print
Prints lists showing configurations on the machine.
[Duplex Test Page] appears only for the Type 2 model.
The lists will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper.
304
Printer Feature Settings
• Config. Page
Prints general information and the current configurations of the machine.
• Menu List
Prints the machine's function menus.
• Test Page
Prints a test page for checking the single-sided printing condition. The test page contains
network settings.
• PCL Font List
Prints installed PCL font list.
• PS Font List
Prints installed PostScript font list.
• Duplex Test Page
Prints a test page for checking the duplex printing condition. The test page contains network
settings.
System
• Copies
Sets the machine to print the specified number of sets.
This setting is disabled if the number of pages to print is specified by the printer driver.
Default: 1
• 1 to 999
• Sub Paper Size
Sets the machine to print onto paper of another size if the specified paper is not loaded in any
tray. Alternative sizes are preset to A4 and Letter.
Default: [Off]
• Auto
• Off
• Default Page Size
Specifies the paper size to be used when the paper size is not specified in the print job.
Default:
[A4],
[8 1/2 × 11]
• A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7 1/4 × 10
1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env,
C6 Env, DL Env
• Duplex
Sets the machine to print on both sides of paper according to the specified binding method.
305
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
Default: [None]
• None
• Long Edge Bind
• Short Edge Bind
• Blank Page Print
Sets the machine to print blank pages.
When cover sheet printing is enabled from the printer driver, cover sheets are inserted even if
you select [Off].
Note that this setting has lower priority than the printer driver's blank page setting ([Do not
Print Blank Pages] on the [Setup] tab of the PCL6 printer driver, or [Print Blank Pages] under
[Printer Features] of the PostScript 3 printer driver).
Default: [On]
• On
• Off
• Print Error Report
Sets the machine to print an error page when the machine detects a printer or memory error.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
PCL Menu
Specifies conditions when using PCL for printing.
• Orientation
Specifies the page orientation.
Default: [Portrait]
• Portrait
• Landscape
• Form Lines
Specifies the number of lines per page.
Default:
• 5 to 128
• Font Number
64,
60
Specifies the ID of the default font you want to use.
Default: 0
• 0 to 89
306
Printer Feature Settings
• Point Size
Specifies the point size for the default font.
This setting is effective only for a variable-space font.
Default: 12.00 points
• 4.00 to 999.75 (you can use the [ ][ ] keys to change the value in 0.25 increments)
• Font Pitch
Specifies the number of characters per inch for the default font.
This setting is effective only for fixed-space fonts.
Default: 10.00 pitch
• 0.44 to 99.99
• Symbol Set
Specifies the character set for the default font. The following sets are available:
Default: [PC-8]
• Roman-8, Roman-9, ISO L1, ISO L2, ISO L5, PC-8, PC-8 D/N, PC-850, PC-852,
PC-858, PC8-TK, Win L1, Win L2, Win L5, Desktop, PS Text, VN Intl, VN US, MS Publ,
Math-8, PS Math, VN Math, Pifont, Legal, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 11, ISO 15, ISO 17, ISO
21, ISO 60, ISO 69, Win 3.0, MC Text, ISO L6, ISO L9, PC-775, PC-1004, Win
Baltic
• Courier Font
Specifies a courier-type font.
Default: [Regular]
• Regular
• Dark
• Ext. A4 Width
Sets the machine to extend the width of the printable area of A4 size paper, reducing side
margin width.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
• Append CR to LF
Sets the machine to append a CR code to each LF code to print text data clearly.
Default: [Off]
• On
• Off
307
7. Configuring the Machine Using the Control Panel
• Resolution
Specifies the print resolution in dots per inch.
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
• 600 × 600 dpi
PS Menu
Specifies conditions when using PostScript for printing.
• Resolution
Specifies the print resolution in dots per inch.
Default: [600 × 600 dpi]
• 600 × 600 dpi
• 1200 × 600 dpi
• 1200 × 1200 dpi
308
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web
Image Monitor
You can check the machine's status or change its settings by accessing the machine directly using Web
Image Monitor.
Using Web Image Monitor
• Some items might not appear, depending on the model type you are using.
• Some items can also be configured using the control panel.
Available operations
The following operations can be performed remotely using Web Image Monitor on a computer:
• Displaying the machine’s status or settings
• Configuring the machine's settings
• Registering the scan and fax destinations
• Registering the fax Special Senders
• Configuring the user restriction settings
• Configuring the network settings
• Configuring the LDAP settings
• Configuring the IPsec settings
• Printing reports
• Setting the administrator password and e-mail address
• Resetting the machine's configuration to the factory default
• Creating backup files of the machine's configuration
• Restoring the machine's configuration from backup files
• Configuring the machine's date and time
• Configuring the machine's Energy Saver mode setting
Supported Web browsers
• Internet Explorer 6 or later
• Firefox 3.0 or later
• Safari 3.0 or later
309
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
• To operate the machine via Web Image Monitor, you must first configure the machine's TCP/IP
settings.
310
Displaying Top Page
Displaying Top Page
When you access the machine using Web Image Monitor, the top page appears in your browser's
window.
1. Launch the Web browser.
2. In the Web browser’s address bar, enter “http://(machine’s IP address)/” to access the
machine.
If a DNS or WINS server is used and the machine’s host name has been specified, you can enter
the host name instead of the IP address.
The top page of Web Image Monitor appears.
Top page
Every Web Image Monitor page is divided into the following areas:
2
3
1
4
CMF099
1. Menu area
Clicking a menu shows its contents in the main area.
2. Tab area
Contains tabs for switching between information and settings you want to see or configure.
3. FAQs/Knowledge Base
Provides answers to frequently asked questions and other useful information about using this
machine.
An internet connection is required to view this information.
4. Main area
Displays the contents of the item selected in the menu area.
311
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Information in the main area is not automatically updated. Click [Refresh] at the upper-right in
the main area to update the information. Click the Web browser's [Refresh] button to refresh
the entire browser screen.
• If you use an older version of a supported Web browser or the Web browser has JavaScript and
cookies disabled, display and operation problems may occur.
• If you are using a proxy server, configure the Web browser settings as necessary. For details about
the settings, contact your network administrator.
• The previous page may not appear even if the back button of the Web browser is clicked. If this
happens, click the refresh button of the Web browser.
• The FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)/Knowledge Base are not available in certain languages.
Changing the Interface Language
Select the desired interface language from the [Language] list.
312
Checking the System Information
Checking the System Information
Click [Home] to display the main page of Web Image Monitor. You can check the current system
information on this page.
This page contains three tabs: [Status], [Counter], and [Machine Information].
Checking the Status Information
Click the [Status] tab on the main page to display system information, paper tray status and toner levels.
Item
Model Name
Location
Description
Shows the name of the machine.
Shows the location of the machine as registered on the [SNMP] page.
Contact
Shows the contact information of the machine as registered on the [SNMP]
page.
Host Name
Shows the host name specified in [Host Name] on the [DNS] page.
Shows the current messages on the machine's display.
Device Status
Status
Item
Description
Print Cartridge
Fusing Unit
Shows the amount of toner remaining.
Shows the remaining life of the fusing unit, as "Status OK", "Replacement
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
313
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Transfer Roller
Shows the remaining life of the transfer roller, as "Status OK", "Replacement
Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
Paper Feed Roller
Shows the remaining life of the paper feed roller, as "Status OK",
"Replacement Required Soon" or "Replacement Required".
For replacing, contact your sales or service representative.
Paper Tray
Item
Description
Tray 1
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of tray 1.
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of tray 2.
Shows the current state and paper size/type setting of the bypass tray.
Tray 2
Bypass Tray
• The information about tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
• If a non-genuine print cartridge is installed, toner life cannot be reliably indicated.
Checking the Counter Information
Click the [Counter] tab on the main page to check the counter information.
314
Checking the System Information
Page Counter
Item
Description
Printer
Shows the following for pages printed using the printer function:
• Total number of pages printed using the printer function, and lists/
reports printed from the [List/Test Print] menu under [Printer Features]
• Number of color pages (always shows 0)
• Number of black-and-white pages printed using the printer function
Scanner
Copier
Fax
Shows the following for pages scanned using the scanner function:
• Total number of pages
• Number of color pages
• Number of black-and-white pages
Shows the following for pages printed using the copier function:
• Total number of pages
• Number of color pages (always shows 0)
• Number of black-and-white pages
Shows the following for public telephone line faxes:
• Total number of pages sent and received
• Number of pages sent
• Number of pages received
Print Counter
Item
Description
Page Total
Shows the total number of all prints from the machine:
• Pages printed using the printer, copy, and fax functions
• Lists/Reports printed from the [Print List/Report] menu
• Lists/Reports printed from the [List/Test Print] menu under [Printer
Features]
Duplex
Item
Description
Duplex Total Page
Shows the total number of sheets printed on both sides.
315
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
• Duplex counter appears for the Type 2 model only.
• A sheet printed on both sides counts as two printed pages.
Checking the Machine Information
Click the [Machine Information] tab on the main page to display machine information.
Machine Information
Item
Firmware Version
Engine FW Version
Machine ID
Description
Shows the version of firmware installed on the machine.
Shows the version of firmware for the machine engine.
Shows the identification number of the machine.
Shows that a fax card is installed.
Fax Card
Total Memory
Shows the total memory installed on the machine.
316
Configuring the System Settings
Configuring the System Settings
Click [System Settings] to display the page for configuring the system settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Sound Volume Adjustment], [Tray Paper Settings], [Copier],
[Fax], [Priority Tray], [Toner Saving], [I/O Timeout], and [Shortcut to Function].
Configuring the Sound Volume
Click the [Sound Volume Adjustment] tab on the system settings page to configure the sound volume
settings.
Sound Volume Adjustment
Item
Description
Panel Key Sound
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a key is pressed from [Off],
[Low], [Middle], or [High].
Ring Volume
Select the volume of the ring when a call is received from [Off], [Low],
[Middle], or [High].
On Hook Mode
Job End Tone
Job Error Tone
Alarm Volume
Select the volume of the sound from the speaker during on hook mode from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is complete from
[Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Select the volume of the beep that sounds when a fax transmission error
occurs from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
Select the volume of the alarm that sounds when an operation error occurs
from [Off], [Low], [Middle], or [High].
317
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Configuring the Paper Settings
Click the [Tray Paper Settings] tab on the system settings page to configure the paper settings.
Tray 1
Item
Paper Size
Description
Select the paper size for tray 1 from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7
1/4 × 10 1/2, 8 × 13, 8 1/2 × 13, 8 1/4 × 13, 16K, Custom Size
Paper Type
Select the paper type for tray 1 from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/m2), Thick
Paper 2 (131 to 162g/m2), Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,
Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Letterhead, Bond Paper, Cardstock,
Label Paper
Tray 2
Item
Description
Paper Size
Select the paper size for tray 2 from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2
Paper Type
Select the paper type for tray 2 from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/m2), Plain
Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper,
Letterhead
318
Configuring the System Settings
Bypass Tray
Item
Description
Paper Size
Select the paper size for the bypass tray from the following:
A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS, A6, 8 1/2 × 14, 8 1/2 × 11, 5 1/2 × 8 1/2, 7
1/4 × 10 1/2, 16K, 4 1/8 × 9 1/2, 3 7/8 × 7 1/2, C5 Env, C6 Env, DL
Env, Custom Size
Paper Type
Select the paper type for the bypass tray from the following:
Thin Paper (52 to 64g/m2), Thick Paper 1 (100 to 130g/m2), Thick
Paper 2 (131 to 162g/m2), Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper,
Preprinted Paper, Prepunched Paper, Letterhead, Bond Paper, Cardstock,
Label Paper, Envelope, OHP
Bypass Tray Setting Priority
Item
Description
Bypass Tray Setting
Priority
Select how print jobs using the bypass tray are handled.
• System Settings
The machine prints all print jobs according to the machine’s settings.
An error will occur if the paper size/type settings of the machine and
printer driver do not match.
• Any Size/Type
The machine prints all print jobs according to the printer driver’s
settings.
Printing proceeds even if the paper size/type settings of the machine
and printer driver do not match, but if the paper is too small for the
print job, the printed image will be cropped.
• Any Custom Size/Type
The machine prints custom size print jobs according to the printer
driver’s settings and prints standard size print jobs according to the
machine’s settings.
For custom size print jobs, printing proceeds even if the paper size/
type settings of the machine and printer driver do not match, but if the
paper is too small for the print job, the printed image will be cropped.
For standard size print jobs, an error will occur if the paper size/type
settings of the machine and printer driver do not match.
319
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
• The information about tray 2 appears only when it is installed.
Specifying the Size of Paper for Printing Copies
Click the [Copier] tab on the system settings page to specify the size of paper for printing copies.
Select Paper
Item
Select Paper
Description
Select the paper size used for printing copies from the following: [Tray 1],
[Tray 2], [Bypass Tray], [A4], or [8 1/2 × 11].
When a tray is selected, the machine prints from that tray only. When a
paper size is selected, the machine checks the trays for the paper of the
specified size in the order of priority as set in [Copier] in the [Priority Tray]
page.
If multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be
used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
• [Tray 2] appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Configuring the Fax Settings
Click the [Fax] tab on the system settings page to configure the fax settings.
320
Configuring the System Settings
Select Paper Tray
Item
Description
Select Paper Tray
Select the tray for printing faxes from the following: [Auto], [Tray 1], or
[Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected, the machine uses tray 1 and tray 2 if they contain
paper of the same size. In this case, the machine starts to print from the tray
specified as the priority tray for [Fax] in the [Priority Tray] page. If that tray
runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the other tray to
continue printing.
Only A4, Letter, or Legal size paper can be used for printing faxes. Make
sure to select a tray that contains paper of the valid size.
If tray 2 is not installed, only [Tray 1] appears.
Fax Number Confirmation
Item
Description
Fax Number
Confirmation
Enable this setting to configure the machine to require a fax number to be
entered twice when specifying a destination manually.
This setting appears only when the administrator password is set in the
[Administrator] page.
Fax Received File Processing
Item
Description
Received File
Processing
Select whether received faxes are stored into the machine’s memory for
printing or forwarded to a destination specified for [Forwarding
Destination].
321
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Print Automatically
Select whether the faxes received into the machine’s memory are printed
automatically or stored for later manual printing.
Print Forwarded File
Notify Forward Status
Select whether the forwarded faxes are printed or not.
Select whether e-mail notifications are sent after forwarding faxes or not. E-
mail notification destination depends on how [Forwarding Destination] is
specified:
• If specified with [E-mail Address]: the notification will be sent to the
administrator e-mail address specified in [Administrator E-mail
Address] in the [Administrator] page.
• If specified with [Scan Destination]: the notification will be sent to the
notification destination specified for the selected scan destination.
Note that if a destination e-mail address is not specified, no notification will
be sent even if this setting is enabled.
Forwarding Destination Specifies the forwarding destination.
• [E-mail Address]: Enter a destination e-mail address. Can contain up
to 64 characters.
• [Scan Destination]: Select a scan destination as a forwarding
destination.
Number of Trials of
Forwarding (time)
Specifies how many times the machine attempts to forward a fax (1 to 255
times).
Interval of Forwarding
Trial (min.)
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between forwarding
attempts (1 to 255 minutes).
Authorized Reception
Item
Description
Authorized Reception
Enable this setting to set the machine to receive (or reject) faxes only from
the programmed Special Senders. This helps you screen out unwanted
documents, such as junk faxes, and prevents the wasting of fax paper.
Special Senders can be programmed in the [Special Sender] page.
322
Configuring the System Settings
Item
Description
Receive Conditions
Specifies whether to receive or reject faxes from the programmed Special
Senders.
• Special Sender
Receive faxes from the Special Senders and reject faxes from all other
senders.
• Other Than Special Sender
Reject faxes from the Special Senders and receive faxes from all other
senders.
Specifying the Priority Tray
Click the [Priority Tray] tab on the system settings page to specify the priority tray.
Priority Tray
Item
Description
Printer
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1], [Tray 2], or [Bypass Tray].
If automatic tray selection is specified for the print job and multiple trays
contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for printing;
when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically switches to the
next tray to continue printing.
323
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Copier
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1], [Tray 2], or [Bypass Tray].
If [A4] or [8 1/2 × 11] is selected for [Select Paper] in the [Copier] page
and multiple trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will
be used for printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine
automatically switches to the next tray to continue printing.
Fax
Select the tray that the machine checks first for paper that can be used for
the job from [Tray 1] or [Tray 2].
If [Auto] is selected for [Select Paper Tray] in the [Fax] page and multiple
trays contain valid paper, the first tray the machine finds will be used for
printing; when that tray runs out of paper, the machine automatically
switches to the next tray to continue printing.
• [Tray 2] appears only when tray 2 is installed.
Configuring the Toner Saving Setting
Click the [Toner Saving] tab on the system settings page to configure the toner saving setting.
324
Configuring the System Settings
Toner Saving
Item
Description
Toner Saving
Enable this setting to print using a reduced amount of toner when printing
out copies.
Configuring the I/O Timeout Settings
Click the [I/O Timeout] tab on the system settings page to configure the I/O timeout settings.
I/O Timeout
Item
Description
Fixed USB Port
Specifies whether the same printer/LAN-Fax driver can be used for multiple
machines or not under USB connection.
If this setting is enabled, the same printer/LAN-Fax driver you have
installed in your computer can be used with any machine other than the one
originally used for installation, if the machine is of the same model.
If disabled, you must install the printer/LAN-Fax driver separately for
individual machines, because the machine other than the original will be
recognized as a new device upon USB connection.
Locked Print Timeout
(seconds)
Specifies how many seconds the machine holds a new Locked Print file,
when the machine cannot store any more Locked Print files (0 to 300
seconds). Within this time, you can print or delete the new Locked Print file.
You can also print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine.
Configuring the Shortcut to Function Key Settings
Click the [Shortcut to Function] tab on the system settings page to configure the Shortcut to Function key
settings.
325
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Shortcut to Function
Item
Description
Shortcut to Function
Settings
Assigns one of the following functions to the [Shortcut to Func.] key on the
control panel.
• [ID Card Copy Mode]
• [Fax Auto Print Setting]
• [Fax Immediate TX]
• [Select Scanner Destination]
• [Duplex/Combine Copy]
326
Registering Destinations
Registering Destinations
Scan and fax destinations can be registered using Web Image Monitor.
A maximum of 100 scan destinations and 220 fax destinations (20 Quick Dial and 200 Speed Dial
destinations) can be registered. See the scan and fax sections for more information on registering
destinations.
327
Restricting Machine Functions According to User
Restricting Machine Functions According to
User
You can set the machine to require a user code when someone tries to use certain machine functions.
• When print jobs are restricted, you can only authenticate through the PCL6 printer driver. Printing
from the PostScript 3 printer driver will not be possible.
• User restriction settings can be used in combination with LDAP authentication, except for printing
using the PCL6 printer driver and sending LAN-Faxes. Under LDAP authentication, users will only
be able to authenticate for PCL6 printing and LAN-Faxes using user names and passwords for the
LDAP server, not user codes for the user restriction settings.
Using Web Image Monitor, enable user restriction for all or some of the functions listed below, and then
register users who can use those functions.
• Copying
• Sending faxes
• Scan to E-mail/FTP/Folder
• Scan to USB
• Printing
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
For each user, you can specify which functions are available upon authentication. A maximum of 30
users can be registered.
329
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Configuring the Network Settings
Click [Network Settings] to display the page for configuring the network settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Network Status], [IPv6 Configuration], [Network Application],
[DNS], [Auto E-mail Notification], [SNMP], [SMTP], [POP3], and [Internet Fax].
Checking the Network Status
Click the [Network Status] tab on the network settings page to display network information.
General Status
Item
Description
Ethernet Speed
IPP Printer Name
Network Version
Shows the type and speed of the network connection.
Shows the name used to identify the machine on the network.
Shows the version of the machine's network module (a part of the machine
firmware).
MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the machine.
TCP/IP Status
Item
Description
DHCP
Select whether the machine should receive a dynamic IPv4 address
automatically using DHCP. To use DHCP, select [Active]. When enabled,
the items below cannot be configured.
Enter the IPv4 address for the machine.
Enter the subnet mask of the network.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
330
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Gateway
Enter the IPv4 address of the network gateway.
Configuring the IPv6 Settings
Click the [IPv6 Configuration] tab on the network settings page to configure the IPv6 settings.
IPv6
Item
Description
IPv6
Select whether to enable or disable IPv6. You cannot disable IPv6 using
Web Image Monitor if the machine is currently in use in an IPv6
environment. In this case, use the control panel to disable [IPv6] under
network settings.
When disabled, [DHCP], [Manual Configuration Address], [Prefix Length],
and [Gateway Address] below cannot be configured.
IPv6 Address
Item
Description
DHCP
Select whether or not the machine obtains its IPv6 address from a DHCP
server.
IP Address (DHCP)
Displays the IPv6 address obtained from the DHCP server when [DHCP] is
set to [Active].
Stateless Address
Gateway Address
Link-local Address
Displays up to four stateless auto addresses.
Displays the machine's default gateway address.
Displays the link local address of the machine. The link local address is an
address that is valid only inside the local network (local segment).
331
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Manual Configuration
Address
Enter the machine's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length, using a value between 0 and 128.
Gateway Address
Enter the default gateway's IPv6 address. Can contain up to 39 characters.
Configuring the Network Application Settings
Click the [Network Application] tab on the network settings page to configure the network application
settings.
Scanner Send Setting
Item
Description
E-mail
Select to enable the Scan to E-mail feature.
Max. E-mail Size
Select the maximum size of scan files that can be attached to an e-mail
message (1 to 5 MB, or no limit).
FTP
Select to enable the Scan to FTP feature.
Select to enable the Scan to Folder feature.
Folder
332
Configuring the Network Settings
Network Print Setting
Item
Description
IPP
Select to enable network printing using Internet Print Protocol (via TCP port
631/80).
FTP
Select to enable network printing using an embedded FTP server in the
machine (via TCP port 20/21).
RAW
Select to enable network raw printing.
Port No.
Enter the TCP port number to use for raw printing. The valid range is 1024
to 65535, except 53550 and 49999 (default is 9100).
LPR
Select to enable network printing using LPR/LPD (via TCP port 515).
mDNS Setting
Item
Description
mDNS
Select to enable Multicast DNS (via UDP port 5353). If disabled, the item
below cannot be configured.
Printer Name
Enter the name of the machine. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Configuring the DNS Settings
Click the [DNS] tab on the network settings page to configure the DNS settings.
333
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
DNS
Item
Description
DNS Method
Select whether to specify domain name servers manually or receive DNS
information from the network automatically. When set to [Auto], [Primary
DNS Server], [Secondary DNS Server], and [Domain Name] below
become unavailable.
Primary DNS Server
Enter the IPv4 address of the primary DNS.
Secondary DNS Server Enter the IPv4 address of the secondary DNS.
Domain Name
Enter the IPv4 domain name for the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
IPv6 DNS Method
Select whether to specify the domain server manually or have the machine
obtain its DNS information automatically.
When set to [Auto], [Primary IPv6 DNS Server], [Secondary IPv6 DNS
Server], and [IPv6 Domain Name] below become unavailable.
Primary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the primary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up to
39 characters.
Secondary IPv6 DNS
Server
Enter the IPv6 address of the secondary IPv6 DNS server. Can contain up
to 39 characters.
IPv6 Domain Name
Enter the IPv6 domain name of the machine. Can contain up to 32
characters.
DNS Resolve Priority
Select whether to give priority to IPv4 or IPv6 for DNS name resolution.
DNS Timeout (seconds) Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering a DNS
request to have timed out (1 to 999 seconds).
Host Name
Enter a host name for the machine. Can contain up to 15 characters.
Configuring the Auto E-mail Notification Settings
Click the [Auto E-mail Notification] tab on the network settings page to configure the e-mail notification
settings.
334
Configuring the Network Settings
E-mail Notification 1/E-mail Notification 2
Item
Description
Display Name
Enter a sender name for notification e-mail. Can contain up to 32
characters.
E-mail Address
Enter the address of the recipient of the alert email. Can contain up to 64
characters.
Paper Misfeed
Out of Paper
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a paper jam occurs.
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if paper runs out.
Replace Print Cartridge Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner becomes low.
Soon
Call Service
Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if the machine
requires servicing.
Replace Print Cartridge Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if toner runs out.
Cover Open Select to send an alert e-mail to the specified address if a cover is open.
Configuring the SNMP Settings
Click the [SNMP] tab on the network settings page to configure the SNMP settings.
335
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
SNMP
Item
Description
SNMP
Select whether to enable the machine to use SNMP services.
Trap
Item
Description
Target Trap
Select whether to enable the machine to send traps to the management host
(NMS).
When disabled, [SNMP Management Host 1] and [SNMP Management
Host 2] below become unavailable.
SNMP Management
Host 1
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
SNMP Management
Host 2
Enter the IP address or host name of a management host. Can contain up to
64 characters.
Community
Item
Description
Get Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Get requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
Trap Community
Enter the community name to use for authentication of Trap requests. Can
contain up to 32 characters.
System
Item
Description
Location
Enter the location of the machine. The location entered here is displayed on
the main page. Can contain up to 64 characters.
336
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Contact
Enter the contact information of the machine. The contact information
entered here is displayed on the main page. Can contain up to 64
characters.
Configuring the SMTP Settings
Click the [SMTP] tab on the network settings page to configure the SMTP settings.
SMTP
Item
Description
Primary SMTP Server
Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP/POP3 server. Can contain
up to 64 characters.
Port No.
Enter the port number for SMTP (1 to 65535).
Authentication Method Select an authentication method from the following:
[Anonymous]: The user name and password are not necessary.
[SMTP]: The machine supports NTLM and LOGIN authentication.
[POP before SMTP]: The POP3 server is used for authentication. When
sending e-mails to an SMTP server, you can enhance the SMTP server
security level by connecting to the POP server for authentication.
User Name
Password
Enter the user name for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
Enter the password for logging in to the SMTP server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
337
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Device E-mail Address Enter the machine’s e-mail address.
This address is used as the sender's address of e-mail messages sent from
this machine, such as notification e-mails and Internet Faxes. Can contain
up to 64 characters.
Server Timeout
(seconds)
Enter the number of seconds the machine waits before considering an
SMTP operation to have timed out (1 to 999).
Time Zone
Select a time zone according to your geographic location. Selecting a
different time zone may cause transmission date and time to be incorrect for
email sent by the Scan to E-mail function, even when the machine's clock is
set correctly.
Configuring the POP3 Settings
Click the [POP3] tab on the network settings page to configure the POP3 settings.
POP3 Settings
Item
POP3 Server
Description
Enter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server for e-mail reception.
The POP3 server specified here will be used for [POP before SMTP]. Can
contain up to 64 characters.
User Account
Enter the user name for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
If an e-mail address is entered here, the address will be used as the e-mail
address for receiving Internet Faxes.
User Password
Enter the password for logging in to the POP3 server. Can contain up to 32
characters.
338
Configuring the Network Settings
Item
Description
Authentication
Select an authentication method from the following:
[None]: Password will not be encrypted.
[APOP Authentication]: Password will be encrypted.
[Auto]: Password will be encrypted or not encrypted according to the POP3
server’s settings.
Configuring the Internet Fax Settings
Click the [Internet Fax] tab on the network settings page to configure the Internet Fax settings.
Internet Fax Settings
Item
Description
Internet Fax
Select whether to enable or disable the Internet Fax function.
Transmission
Error Notification E-
mail
Select whether to send a notification e-mail to the sender of the Internet Fax
or not when e-mail reception fails.
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator
settings page).
Insert System-fixed Text Select whether to include system-fixed text in the body of the e-mail or not
when sending Internet Faxes.
The text will include the machine's host name (as set in the DNS settings
page), model name, and contact e-mail address (as set in the administrator
settings page).
Automatic POP
Select whether to automatically connect to the POP3 server to check for
new e-mails or not. If this setting is enabled, the connection will be made at
an interval specified in [POP Interval (minutes)].
339
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
POP Server: E-mail
Reception Setting
Select whether to leave or delete e-mails in the POP3 server after receiving
them.
[No]: Delete e-mails from the server after receiving them.
[Save E-mail]: Leave e-mails on the server after receiving them.
[Save Only Error Info]: Delete e-mails that are successfully received from
the server only.
POP Interval (minutes)
Specifies how many minutes the machine waits between automatic
connections to the POP3 server to acquire new e-mails (2 to 1440
minutes).
340
Configuring the LDAP Server Settings
Configuring the LDAP Server Settings
Click [LDAP Settings] to display the page for configuring the LDAP settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [LDAP Authentication] and [Program/Change/Delete LDAP
Server].
Configuring the LDAP Authentication Settings
Click the [LDAP Authentication] tab on the LDAP settings page to configure the LDAP authentication
settings.
Item
Description
Authentication
Select whether to enable or disable LDAP authentication.
Auto Logout Time
(seconds)
Enter the number of seconds until the authentication expires (60 to 999 or
0, which is no limit).
Programming/Changing/Deleting the LDAP Server
Click the [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server] tab on the LDAP settings page to display the list of
programmed LDAP servers.
341
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
LDAP Search
Select whether to enable or disable LDAP search to retrieve addresses for
scanner and fax destinations.
LDAP Search Timeout
Enter the number of seconds before the machine considers the LDAP search
to have timed out (1 to 60).
To configure LDAP server settings, select the desired LDAP server from the list under "Program/Change/
Delete", and then click [Change] to open the "Edit LDAP Server" page. The following settings can be
made on that page.
LDAP Settings
Item
Description
Identification Name
(Required)
Enter the LDAP server's name. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Server Name
(Required)
Enter the LDAP server's host name or IP address. Can contain up to 64
characters.
Search Base (Required) Enter the position within the LDAP directory's structure from which to start
user searches. Can contain up to 128 characters.
Port Number
(Required)
Enter the port number used to connect to the LDAP server. The valid range is
from 1 to 65535 (default is 389 when [SSL] is [Inactive], or 636 when
[SSL] is [Active]).
SSL
Select whether or not to use SSL to communicate with the LDAP server.
Select [Active] to encrypt communication between the machine and LDAP
server; select [Inactive] for communication without encryption.
342
Configuring the LDAP Server Settings
Item
Description
Authentication
Select whether or not to perform authentication when the machine connects
to the LDAP server.
• [Inactive]: Anonymous (no authentication)
• [Active]: Cleartext authentication
• [High Security]: CRAM-MD5 authentication
If [Active] or [High Security] is selected, you must also set [Login Name
Attribute], [User Name (Optional)], and [Password (Optional)].
Login Name Attribute
Specify the user name prefix or login name attribute of Bind DN, such as
“uid” or “cn”, according to the LDAP server. Can contain up to 16
characters.
If [Authentication] is [Active] or [High Security], you cannot leave this setting
blank.
User Name (Optional) Enter the user name to log in to the LDAP server. Can contain up to 128
characters.
If [Authentication] is [Active] or [High Security], you cannot leave this setting
blank.
Password (Optional)
Enter the password to log in to the LDAP server. Can contain up to 128
characters.
If [Authentication] is [Active] or [High Security], you cannot leave this setting
blank.
Japanese Character
Code Set (Required)
Select the character code the LDAP server uses.
Connection Test
Click [Start] to see whether or not connection to the LDAP server is possible
using the settings made.
Search Conditions
Item
Description
Identification Name
(Required)
Enter an attribute type by which the user name can be distinguished. Can
contain up to 16 characters.
Email Address
(Required)
Enter an attribute type by which the user e-mail address can be
distinguished. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Fax Number (Required) Enter an attribute type by which the user fax number can be distinguished.
Can contain up to 32 characters.
343
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Company Name
(Required)
Enter an attribute type by which the user's company (or organization) name
can be distinguished. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Department Name
(Required)
Enter an attribute type by which the user's department name can be
distinguished. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Search Options
Item
Description
Attribute (Optional)
Enter an attribute type by which the user can be distinguished. Can contain
up to 16 characters.
If you set this item, also set [Key Display (Optional)].
Key Display (Optional) Enter the name shown on the machine's control panel, which is used for
LDAP search to search a user based on the attribute type specified in
[Attribute (Optional)]. Can contain up to 20 characters.
If you set this item, also set [Attribute (Optional)].
344
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Click [IPsec Settings] to display the page for configuring the IPsec settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [IPsec Global Settings] and [IPsec Policy List].
• This function is available only when an administrator password is specified.
Configuring the IPsec Global Settings
Click the [IPsec Global Settings] tab on the IPsec settings page to configure the IPsec global settings.
Item
IPsec Function
Default Policy
Description
Select whether to enable or disable IPsec.
Select whether to allow for the default IPsec policy.
Broadcast and
Multicast Bypass
Select the services that you do not want to apply IPsec from the following:
[DHCPv4], [DHCPv6], [SNMP], [mDNS], [NetBIOS], [UDP Port 53550]
All ICMP Bypass
Select whether to apply IPsec to ICMP packets (IPv4 and IPv6) from the
following:
[Active]: All ICMP packets will be bypassed without IPsec protection.
"ping" command (echo request and echo reply) is not encapsulated by
IPsec.
[Inactive]: Some ICMP message types will be bypassed without IPsec
protection.
345
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
• For details about which ICMP message types will be bypassed when setting [All ICMP Bypass] to
[Inactive], see Web Image Monitor Help.
Configuring the IPsec Policy
Click the [IPsec Policy List] tab on the IP security settings page to display the list of registered IPsec
policies.
Item
Description
No.
IPsec policy number.
Name
Displays the name of the IPsec policy.
Address Settings
Displays the IP address filter of the IPsec policy as below:
Remote address/Prefix length
Action
Status
Displays the action of the IPsec policy as "Allow", "Drop", or "Require
Security".
Displays the status of the IPsec policy as "Active" or "Inactive".
To configure IPsec policies, select the desired IPsec policy, and then click [Change] to open the "IPsec
Policy Settings" page. The following settings can be made on the "IPsec Policy Settings" page.
346
Configuring the IPsec Settings
IP Policy Settings
Item
Description
No.
Specify a number between 1 and 10 for the IPsec policy. The number you
specify will determine the position of the policy in the IPsec Policy List. Policy
searching is performed according to the order of the list. If the number you
specify is already assigned to another policy, the policy you are
configuring will take the number of the earlier policy, and the earlier policy
and any subsequent policies will be renumbered accordingly.
Activity
Select whether to enable or disable the policy.
Name
Enter the name of the policy. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Address Type
Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the type of IP address to be used in IPsec
communication.
Local Address
Displays the IP address of this printer.
Remote Address
Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the device with which to communicate.
Can contain up to 39 characters.
Prefix Length
Enter the prefix length of the Remote Address, using a value between 1 and
128. If this setting is left blank, "32" (IPv4) or "128" (IPv6) will be
automatically selected.
347
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Action
Specify how the IP packets are processed from the following:
• [Allow]: IP packets are both sent and received without IPsec applied to
them.
• [Drop]: IP packets are discarded.
• [Require Security]: IPsec is applied to IP packets that are both sent and
received.
If you have selected [Require Security], you must configure [IPsec Settings]
and [IKE Settings].
IPsec Settings
Item
Description
Encapsulation Type
Specify the encapsulation type from the following:
• [Transport]: Select this mode to secure only the payload section of
each IP packet when communicating with IPsec compliant devices.
• [Tunnel]: Select this mode to secure every section of each IP packet.
We recommend this type for communication between security
gateways (such as VPN devices).
Security Protocol
Select the security protocol from the following:
• [AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports authentication
only.
• [ESP]: Establishes secure communication that supports both
authentication and data encryption.
• [ESP&AH]: Establishes secure communication that supports both data
encryption and authentication of packets, including packet headers.
Note that you cannot specify this protocol when [Tunnel] is selected
for [Encapsulation Type].
Authentication
Algorithm for AH
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [AH] or [ESP&AH]
is selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Encryption Algorithm
for ESP
Specify the encryption algorithm to be applied when [ESP] or [ESP&AH] is
selected for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[None], [DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
348
Configuring the IPsec Settings
Item
Description
Authentication
Algorithm for ESP
Specify the authentication algorithm to be applied when [ESP] is selected
for [Security Protocol] from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
Life Time
Specify the life time of the IPsec SA (Security Association) as a time period
or data volume. The SA will expire when the time period you specify
elapses or the volume of data you specify reaches the volume carried.
If you specify both a time period and a data volume, the SA will expire as
soon as either is reached, and a new SA will then be obtained by
negotiation.
To specify the life time of the SA as a time period, enter a number of
seconds.
To specify the life time of the SA as a data volume, enter a number of KBs.
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
IKE Settings
Item
Description
IKE Version
Displays the IKE version.
Encryption Algorithm
Specify the encryption algorithm from the following:
[DES], [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192], [AES-256]
Authentication
Algorithm
Specify the authentication algorithm from the following:
[MD5], [SHA1]
IKE Life Time
Specify the life time of the ISAKMP SA as a time period. Enter a number of
seconds.
IKE Diffie-Hellman
Group
Select the IKE Diffie-Hellman Group to be used in the generation of the IKE
encryption key from the following:
[DH1], [DH2]
Pre-Shared Key
Specify the PSK (Pre-Shared Key) to be used for authentication of a
communicating device. Can contain up to 32 characters.
Key Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Select whether to enable or disable PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy).
349
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
350
Printing Lists/Reports
Printing Lists/Reports
Click [Print List/Report] to display the page for printing reports. Then, select an item and click [Print] to
print out information for that item.
Print List/Report
Item
Configuration Page
Fax Journal
Description
Prints general information about the machine and its current configuration.
Prints a fax transmission and reception journal for the last 50 jobs.
Fax TX/RX Standby File Prints a list of fax jobs remaining in the machine's memory to be printed,
List sent, or forwarded.
Quick Dial Destination Prints a list of Quick Dial entries.
List
Fax Speed Dial
Destination List
Prints a list of Speed Dial entries.
Scanner Destination List Prints a list of scan destinations.
Scanner Journal
Prints a scanner journal for the last 100 Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, and
Scan to Folder transmissions.
Maintenance Page
Prints the maintenance page.
• Reports cannot be printed via Web Image Monitor if other jobs are printing. Before printing
reports, confirm that machine is not printing.
• Reports will be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load one of these sizes of paper into the tray
before printing reports.
351
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
352
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Click [Administrator Tools] to display the page for configuring the administrator settings.
This page contains the following tabs: [Administrator], [Reset Settings], [Backup Setting], [Restore
Setting], [Set Date/Time], and [Energy Saver Mode].
Configuring the Administrator Password and E-mail Address
Click the [Administrator] tab on the administrator settings page to configure the administrator password
and e-mail address.
Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Change Password
New Password
Check this to configure the administrator password.
Enter the new administrator password. Can contain up to 16 characters.
Confirm New Password Enter the same password again, to confirm.
Change E-mail Address Check this to configure the administrator e-mail address.
Administrator E-mail
Address
Enter the administrator e-mail address.
If the machine’s e-mail address is not configured in the [SMTP] page, this
address will be used as the sender's address of e-mails sent from this
machine, such as notification e-mails and Internet Faxes. Can contain up to
64 characters.
353
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Resetting the Machine’s Settings
Click the [Reset Settings] tab on the administrator settings page to reset the machine's settings.
Reset Settings
Item
Description
Reset Network Settings Select to restore the following settings to their defaults:
• Settings under [Network Settings]
• Settings under [LDAP Server]
• Settings under the [Administrator] tab of [Administrator Tools]
Reset Menu Settings
Select to restore the settings other than the following to their defaults:
• Network settings
• Scan destinations
• User restriction settings
• Fax destinations and Special Sender list
• IPsec settings
• [Printer Registration], [Low Humidity Mode], and [Image Density]
settings under system settings of the control panel setting menu
Clear Scan Destination Select to clear the scan destinations.
Reset Settings of
Select to clear the user restriction settings and counter information for each
Available Functions
user.
Clear Address Book
Reset IPsec Settings
Select to clear the fax destinations and Special Sender list.
Select to clear the IPsec settings.
• [Reset IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
354
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Backing Up the Machine's Settings
Click the [Backup Setting] tab on the administrator settings page to create backup files containing the
machine's configuration settings. If necessary, these backup files can be used to restore previous
configurations.
• When sending the machine for repair, it is important that you create backup files in advance. The
machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
Backup Setting
Item
Description
Backs up the following settings to a file:
Back up Network
Settings
• Settings under [Network Settings]
• Settings under [LDAP Server]
• Settings under the [Administrator] tab of [Administrator Tools]
Note that, however, [Max. E-mail Size] setting under [Network
Application] will not be backed up here; it will be backed up by [Back up
Menu Settings] instead.
Back up Menu Settings Backs up the settings other than the following to a file:
• Network settings
• Scan destinations
• User restriction settings
• Fax destinations and Special Sender list
• IPsec settings
• [Printer Registration], [Low Humidity Mode], and [Image Density]
settings under system settings of the control panel setting menu
355
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Back up Scan
Destination
Backs up scan destinations to a file.
Back up Settings of
Available Functions
Backs up user restriction settings and counter information for each user to a
file.
Back up Address Book Backs up fax destinations and Special Sender list to a file.
Back up IPsec Settings Backs up the IPsec settings to a file.
Follow the procedure below to create configuration backup files.
1. Select the radio button for the type of data you wish to back up.
2. Enter the administrator password if required.
3. Click [OK].
4. Click [Save] in the confirmation dialog box.
5. Navigate to the location to save the backup file.
6. Specify a name for the file, and click [Save].
• [Back up IPsec Settings] appears only when the administrator password is specified.
Restoring the Machine's Settings from a Backup File
Click the [Restore Setting] tab on the administrator settings page to restore the machine's settings from a
previously created backup file.
• When the machine is returned from repair, it is important that you restore the machine's settings
from the backup files. The machine's settings are returned to the default after repair.
356
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Restore Setting
Item
Description
File to Restore
Enter the path and name of the file to restore, or click [Browse...] to select
the file.
Follow the procedure below to restore configuration backup files.
1. Click [Browse...].
2. Navigate to the directory containing the backup file to restore.
3. Select the backup file, and click [Open].
4. Enter the administrator password if required.
5. Click [OK].
• If the settings are not restored successfully, an error message appears. Try again to restore the file
completely.
Configuring the Date and Time Settings
Click the [Set Date/Time] tab on the administrator settings page to configure the date and time settings.
Set Date
Item
Description
Enter the current year (2000 to 2099).
Year
Month
Day
Enter the current month (1 to 12).
Enter the current day (1 to 31).
357
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
Item
Description
Date Format
Select the date format from [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or
[YYYY/MM/DD].
Set Time
Item
Description
Time Format
Time (AM/PM)
hour (0-23)
hour (1-12)
min. (0-59)
Select 24- or 12-hour time format.
Select [AM] or [PM] if 12-hour time format is selected.
Enter the current hour if 24-hour time format is selected (0-23).
Enter the current hour if 12-hour time format is selected (1-12).
Enter the current minute (0-59).
Configuring the Energy Saver Mode Settings
Click the [Energy Saver Mode] tab on the administrator settings page to set the machine to enter Energy
Saver mode, Energy Saver mode 1 or Energy Saver mode 2, to reduce power consumption.
Energy Saver Mode
Item
Description
Energy Saver Mode 1
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 1 if the
machine has been idle for about 30 seconds.
It takes less time to recover from Energy Saver mode 1 than from power-off
state or Energy Saver mode 2, but power consumption is higher in Energy
Saver mode 1 than in Energy Saver mode 2.
358
Configuring the Administrator Settings
Item
Description
Energy Saver Mode 2
Select [Active] to set the machine to enter Energy Saver mode 2 after the
period of time specified for [Waiting Time (1-240)] is passed (1 to 240
minutes).
The machine consumes less power in Energy Saver mode 2 than in Energy
Saver mode 1, but it takes longer to recover from Energy Saver mode 2
than from Energy Saver mode 1.
• The machine recovers from Energy Saver mode when it receives a print job, prints a received fax,
or when the [Copy] or [Start] key is pressed.
359
8. Configuring the Machine Using Web Image Monitor
360
9. Troubleshooting
Common Problems
This section describes how to troubleshoot common problems that may occur while operating the
machine.
Problem
Possible cause
Solution
• Make sure that the power
plug is firmly inserted into
the wall outlet.
The power cord is not
connected properly.
The machine does not turn on.
• Make sure that the wall
outlet is not defective by
connecting another
working device.
An error message is shown on
the machine's screen.
An error has occurred.
Wait until "Printing..." appears
on the screen. If "Processing..."
is displayed on the screen, the
machine is receiving data.
The machine is warming up or
receiving data.
Pages are not printed.
• Reconnect the cable.
The interface cable is not
connected correctly.
Pages are not printed.
Strange noise is heard.
• Check that the interface
cable is the correct type.
The supplies or options are not
properly installed.
Confirm that the supplies or
options are properly installed.
Adjust the volume of the beep,
ring, speaker, and alarm
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
loud.
The volume is set to the high
level.
Adjust the volume of the beep,
The volume is muted or set to the ring, speaker, and alarm
The volume of the sounds
produced by the machine is too
quiet.
low level.
• If any of these problems persist, turn off the power, pull out the power cord, and contact your sales
or service representative.
362
Paper Feed Problems
Paper Feed Problems
If the machine is operating but paper will not feed or paper jams occur frequently, check the condition of
the machine and paper.
Problem
Solution
• Load paper correctly, making sure that the paper guides
Paper does not feed smoothly.
• If the paper is curled, straighten the paper.
• Take out the paper from tray and fan it well. Then,
reverse the top and bottom of the paper, and put it back
in the tray.
• If there are gaps between the paper and the paper
guides, adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.
• Avoid printing on both sides of paper when printing
images that contain large solid areas, which consume a
lot of toner.
Paper jams occur frequently.
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the paper guide.
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
363
9. Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• Fan the paper well before loading. Also make sure that
the edges are even by tapping the stack on a flat surface
such as a desk.
• Make sure that the paper guides are in the right position.
Multiple sheets of paper are fed at
one time.
• Load paper only as high as the upper limit markings on
the paper guide.
• Make sure that the friction pads and paper feed rollers
• Check that paper was not added while there was still
some left in the tray.
Only add paper when there is none left in the tray.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
Paper gets wrinkles.
• If there are gaps between the paper and the paper
guides, adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.
• Load the paper upside down in the paper tray.
• If the paper curl is severe, take prints from the output tray
more frequently.
The printed paper is curled.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
Images are printed diagonally to the
pages.
If there are gaps between the paper and the paper guides,
adjust the paper guides to remove the gaps.
CER091
364
Paper Feed Problems
Removing Printing Jams
If a paper jam occurs, one of the following messages appears on the screen:
• "Misfeed: Bypass Tray"
• "Misfeed: Dup. Unit Remove Paper"
• "Internal Misfeed"
• "Misfeed: Stnd. Tray"
• "Misfeed: Tray 1"
• "Misfeed: Tray 2"
• Jammed paper may be covered in toner. Be careful not to get toner on your hands or clothes.
• Toner on prints made immediately after clearing a paper jam may be insufficiently fused and can
smudge. Make test prints until smudges no longer appear.
• Do not forcefully remove jammed paper, as it may tear. Torn pieces remaining inside the machine
will cause further jams and possibly damage the machine.
• Paper jams can cause pages to be lost. Check your print job for missing pages and reprint any
pages that did not print out.
Removing internal/tray 1/tray 2 jam
If "Internal Misfeed", "Misfeed: Tray 1", "Misfeed: Tray 2" appears on the display, follow the procedure
below to remove it.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
365
9. Troubleshooting
1. Pull tray 1 halfway out, and check for jammed paper. If there is jammed paper, remove it
carefully.
CMF067
2. Carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops.
3. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper.
4. Close the bypass tray.
5. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
CMF068
6. Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally, holding its center.
CMF069
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
366
Paper Feed Problems
7. Lifting the guide plate, remove the jammed paper carefully.
CMF070
8. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
CMF071
9. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
CMF072
• If paper is jammed in tray 2 but is difficult to locate, pull out tray 2 to remove it. After removing the
paper, carefully push tray 2 all the way back inside the machine.
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
367
9. Troubleshooting
Removing bypass tray jam
If "Misfeed: Bypass Tray" appears on the display, follow the procedure below to remove it.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
1. If paper is jammed in the bypass tray input area, remove the jammed paper carefully.
CMF073
2. Close the bypass tray.
3. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
CMF068
368
Paper Feed Problems
4. Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally, holding its center.
CMF069
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
5. Lifting the guide plate, remove the jammed paper carefully.
CMF070
6. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
CMF071
369
9. Troubleshooting
7. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
CMF072
• When closing the front cover, push the upper area of the cover firmly. After closing the cover,
check that the error is cleared.
Removing standard tray/duplex unit jam
If "Misfeed: Stnd. Tray" or "Misfeed: Dup. Unit Remove Paper" appears on the display, follow the
procedure below to remove it.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Some of this machine's internal components get very hot. For this reason, take care when
removing misfed paper. Not doing so could result in burns.
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
370
Paper Feed Problems
1. Open the rear cover.
CMF074
2. Remove the jammed paper carefully.
CMF075
3. Close the rear cover.
CMF076
371
9. Troubleshooting
4. Pull tray 1 halfway out, and check for jammed paper. If there is jammed paper, remove it
carefully.
CMF067
5. Pull tray 1 out completely with both hands.
CMF077
Place the tray on a flat surface.
6. Push the lever.
Pushing the lever lowers the duplex transport unit.
CMF078
372
Paper Feed Problems
7. If there is jammed paper, carefully remove it.
CMF079
8. With the duplex transport unit still lowered, carefully slide tray 1 back in until it stops.
CMF080
9. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper and close the bypass tray.
10. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
CMF068
373
9. Troubleshooting
11. Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally, holding its center.
CMF069
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
12. Lifting the guide plate, remove the jammed paper carefully.
CMF070
13. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
CMF071
374
Paper Feed Problems
14. Using both hands, carefully push up the front cover until it closes.
CMF072
• When closing the covers, push the covers firmly. After closing the covers, check that the error is
cleared.
Removing Scanning Jams (Type 2 model)
When the following message appears on the screen, follow the procedure below to remove the original
jammed in the ARDF:
• "ADF Orig. Misfeed Open ADF Cover and remove paper."
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
1. Open the ARDF cover.
CMF081
375
9. Troubleshooting
2. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it. Be careful not to pull the original too hard,
as it may rip.
CMF082
3. If you cannot pull out the jammed original easily, move the lever slightly to the machine
rear, and then raise it to unlock the paper feed roller.
CMF083
4. Lift the paper feed roller slightly and pull it out toward you.
CMF116
376
Paper Feed Problems
5. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it.
CMF085
6. If you cannot pull out the jammed original easily, raise the input tray to see if the original
is jammed in the output area.
CMF086
7. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it.
CMF087
377
9. Troubleshooting
8. Put the paper feed roller back in with the roller part facing downwards.
CMF117
9. Lower the lever to lock the paper feed roller.
CMF089
10. Close the ARDF cover.
CMF090
11. Lift the ARDF, and if there is original remaining in the ARDF, gently pull the jammed
original to remove it.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ARDF, for the tray might be damaged.
378
Paper Feed Problems
CMF091
12. Close the ARDF.
Removing Scanning Jams (Type 1 model)
When the following message appears on the screen, follow the procedure below to remove the original
jammed in the ADF:
• "ADF Orig. Misfeed Open ADF Cover and remove paper."
• When removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.
1. Open the ADF cover.
CMF118
379
9. Troubleshooting
2. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it. Be careful not to pull the original too hard,
as it may rip.
CMF119
3. If you cannot pull out the jammed original easily, move the lever slightly to the machine
rear, and then raise it to unlock the paper feed roller.
CMF120
4. Lift the paper feed roller slightly and pull it out toward you.
CMF084
380
Paper Feed Problems
5. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it.
CMF121
6. If you cannot pull out the jammed original easily, raise the input tray to see if the original
is jammed in the output area.
CMF122
7. Gently pull the jammed original to remove it.
CMF123
381
9. Troubleshooting
8. Put the paper feed roller back in with the roller part facing downwards.
CMF088
9. Lower the lever to lock the paper feed roller.
CMF124
10. Close the ADF cover.
CMF125
11. Lift the ADF, and if there is original remaining in the ADF, gently pull the jammed original
to remove it.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
382
Paper Feed Problems
CMF126
12. Close the ADF.
383
9. Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems
This section describes likely causes of and possible solutions for problems with print quality.
Checking the Condition of the Machine
If there is a problem with the quality of printing, first check the condition of the machine.
Possible Cause
Solution
There is a problem with the
machine's location.
Make sure that the machine is on a level surface. Place the
machine where it will not be subject to vibration or shock.
Make sure that the paper being used is supported by the
Unsupported types of paper is used.
The paper type setting is incorrect.
Make sure that the paper type setting of the printer driver
Refilled or non-genuine print cartridge reduces print quality
and can cause malfunctions. Use genuine print cartridge only.
A non-genuine print cartridge is
being used.
Print cartridge should be opened before their expiration date
and used within six months of being opened.
An old print cartridge is being used.
The machine is dirty.
Using the machine in a room where humidity level is too low
may cause black lines of a few millimeters thick appearing on
printouts with 75-millimeter spaces in between. Selecting [On]
for [Low Humidity Mode] under system settings may help to
Humidity level surrounding the
machine may be too low.
384
Printer Problems
Printer Problems
This section describes printing problems and possible solutions.
Problem
Solution
If an error occurs when printing, change the computer or
printer driver settings.
• Check the printer icon name does not exceed 32
alphanumeric characters. If it does, shorten it.
An error occurs.
• Check whether other applications are operating.
Close any other applications, as they may be interfering
with printing. If the problem is not resolved, close
unneeded processes too.
• Check that the latest printer driver is being used.
If [I/O Timeout] under [System Settings] is set to 15 seconds,
increase the time period. A print job may be canceled if
printing is frequently interrupted by data from other ports, or if
printing data is large and takes time for processing. For
A print job is canceled.
• The machine already has 5 jobs or 5 MB of Locked Print
data. Print or delete an existing Locked Print file. For
• Even if the machine cannot store any more Locked Print
files, the machine holds the new Locked Print file for the
period of time specified in [Locked Print] under system
settings before canceling that file. Within this time, you
can print or delete the new Locked Print file. You can also
print or delete an existing Locked Print file so that the new
Locked Print file can be stored in the machine. For details
A Locked Print file is canceled.
• The Locked Print file has too many pages or it is too large.
Reduce the number of pages to print, or print with a
lower setting for [Resolution] in [Print Quality]. For details,
see the printer driver Help.
385
9. Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• Processing time depends on data volume. High volume
data, such as graphics-heavy documents, take longer to
process.
There is considerable delay between
the print start command and actual
printing.
• If "Processing..." is displayed on the screen, the machine
is receiving data. Wait for a while.
• To speed up printing, reduce the printing resolution using
the printer driver. For details, see the printer driver Help.
Prints fall in front of the machine
when they are output.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
Prints do not stack properly.
• Paper is damp. Use paper that has been stored properly.
• If you enable [Toner Saving] under [System Settings],
printing is generally less dense.
• Toner is almost depleted. If "Replacement Required: Print
Cartridge" appears on the screen, replace the print
cartridge.
The whole printout is blurred.
• Condensation may have collected. If rapid change in
temperature or humidity occurs, use this machine only
after it has acclimatized.
The toner is powdery and comes
away from the paper, or the printed
image has a matt appearance.
Check if the levers for printing on envelopes inside the rear
cover are properly set. Pull up the levers.
Check if the levers for printing on envelopes inside the rear
cover are properly set. Lower the levers.
Printed envelopes come out creased.
Changing the Printer Driver Settings
You may eliminate certain problems by changing the printer driver settings as described below.
386
Printer Problems
Possible Cause
Solution
• Increase the print quality settings.
• Adjust the image density.
Cannot print properly when using a certain
application, or cannot print image data
properly.
• Set the document to print in gray-scale.
• Increase the print quality settings.
Some characters are printed faintly or not
printed.
• Set the document to print in gray-scale.
Print Positions Do Not Match Display Positions
If the position of items on the printed page differs from the position displayed on the computer screen,
the cause may be one of the following.
Possible Cause
Solution
Check that the page layout settings are properly
configured in the application.
Page layout settings have not been configured.
Make sure the paper size selected in the printer
The paper size setting does not match the paper properties dialog box matches the size of the
loaded.
paper loaded. For details, see the printer driver
Help.
Set the printable area to maximum. For details, see
the printer driver Help.
The printable area has been changed.
Adjusting Printing Position
You can adjust the printing position of each tray. Use the following procedure to adjust the printing
position.
• A test page for checking the printing position will be output from the tray specified as a priority tray
for [Printer] in [Paper Tray Priority] under system settings. Check that the tray you want to adjust is
set as a priority tray before you perform the following procedure.
387
9. Troubleshooting
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
CMF134
2. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Printer Features], and then press the [OK] key.
3. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [List/Test Print], and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Test Page] or [Duplex Test Page], and then press the [OK]
key.
Print a duplex test page to adjust duplex printing position (Type 2 model only).
5. Press [Yes] to print the test page to preview the settings.
6. Press the [User Tools] key.
7. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [System Settings], and then press the [OK] key.
8. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select [Printer Registration], and then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to select the registration you want to adjust, and then press the
[OK] key.
388
Printer Problems
10. Press the [ ] [ ] keys to set the registration value from -15 to +15 (that is, from -1.5 to
+1.5 mm, in 0.1 mm increments), and then press the [OK] key.
Increase the value to shift the print area in the positive direction, and decrease to shift in the
negative direction. Adjust the margins of the test page so that they are equal in size.
2
3
1
4
CMF098
1. Feed Direction
2. Vertical Adjustment
3. Horizontal Adjustment
4. Print Area
11. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
12. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to confirm the adjustment result.
13. Press the [User Tools] key.
389
9. Troubleshooting
Copier Problems
This section describes photocopy problems and possible solutions.
Problem
Solution
On the control panel, change the [Sort] setting under copy
settings to collate pages as you require. For details about
Photocopied pages are not in
correct order.
The original is not set correctly.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ARDF or ADF, place them copy side
Photocopied paper is blank.
If copying from the exposure glass, make sure that there are
no originals in the ARDF or ADF.
The wrong original was copied.
Copied pages come out too light.
Low room temperature may have caused the machine to scan
originals unclearly. Selecting [Long] for [Scan Warm-up Time]
under system settings may help to improve the scanning
Copied pages are too dark or too
light.
Select the correct scan mode according to the type of original.
Copied pages do not look the same
as the originals.
The original may have stuck to the exposure glass due to high
humidity.
Black spots appear when
photocopying a photographic print.
Place the original on the exposure glass, and then place two
or three sheets of white paper on top of it. Leave the ARDF or
ADF open when copying.
The original probably has heavily lined or dotted areas.
A moire pattern is produced.
Switching the setting for image quality between [Photo] and
[Mixed] may eliminate the moire pattern.
390
Copier Problems
Problem
Solution
• Image density is too high.
• Toner on the printed surface is not dry.
Do not touch printed surfaces immediately after copying.
Remove freshly printed sheets one by one, taking care
not to touch printed areas.
Photocopied paper is dirty.
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
When copying from the exposure
glass, the print area of the copy is
out of alignment with the original.
Place the original copy side down, making sure that it is
aligned to the rear left corner and pressed flat against the
exposure glass.
391
9. Troubleshooting
Scanner Problems
This section describes scanner problems and possible solutions.
Problem
Solution
The ARDF/ADF or its cover is open. Close the ARDF/ADF or
its cover.
The machine does not start scanning.
The scanned image is dirty.
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that toner or correction fluid is dry.
The scanned image is distorted or
out of position.
The original was moved during scanning. Do not move the
original during scanning.
The original was placed upside down. Place the original in the
The scanned image is upside down.
The original was placed with the front and back reversed.
When using the exposure glass, place originals copy side
down. When using the ARDF or ADF, place originals copy
The scanned image is blank.
Low room temperature may have caused the machine to scan
originals unclearly. Selecting [Long] for [Scan Warm-up Time]
under system settings may help to improve the scanning
The scanned image comes out too
light.
The scanned image is too dark or
too light.
The Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or
Scan to Folder function does not
work.
Check if a USB flash disk is inserted into the machine. If a USB
flash disk is inserted, scanning functions other than Scan to
USB are not possible from the control panel.
392
Fax Problems
Fax Problems
This section describes fax problems and possible solutions.
When an error code appears on the fax journal or transmission status report
The table below describes the meaning of error codes that appear under "Results" on the fax
journal or transmission status report, and what to do when a particular error code appears.
"X" indicates a number in an error code that appear differently depending on a specific situation.
Error Code
Solution
An original has been jammed inside the ARDF or ADF while
sending a fax in Immediate Transmission mode.
• Remove jammed originals, and then place them again.
1XXX11
The line could not be connected correctly.
• Confirm that the telephone line is properly connected to
the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from the machine, and
connect a standard telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the telephone. If you cannot
make calls this way, contact your telephone company.
1XXX21
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
Dial fails when trying to send faxes.
• Confirm that the fax number you dialed is correct.
• Confirm that the destination is a fax machine.
• Confirm that the line is not busy.
1XXX22 to 1XXX23
• You may need to insert a pause between dial digits. Press
the [Pause/Redial] key after, for example, the area code.
• Confirm that [PSTN / PBX] under [Admin. Tools] is set
properly for your connection method to the telephone
393
9. Troubleshooting
Error Code
Solution
An error occurred while sending a fax.
• Confirm that the telephone line is properly connected to
the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from the machine, and
connect a standard telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the telephone. If you cannot
make calls this way, contact your telephone company.
1XXX32 to 1XXX84
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
The machine was not able to print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too large.
• The paper tray was empty. Load paper in the paper tray.
• The tray set for [Select Paper Tray] under [Fax Features]
did not contain A4, Letter, or Legal size paper. Load
valid size paper in the tray, and configure the paper size
settings under [System Settings] accordingly.
2XXX14
• A cover or tray was open. Close the cover or tray.
• There was a paper jam. Remove the jammed paper. See
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace the print cartridge.
• The received fax was too large. Ask the sender to re-send
the document in parts as several smaller individual faxes,
or to send at a lower resolution.
An error occurred while receiving a fax.
• Confirm that the telephone line is properly connected to
the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from the machine, and
connect a standard telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the telephone. If you cannot
make calls this way, contact your telephone company.
2XXX32 to 2XXX84
• If the problem persists, contact your sales or service
representative.
394
Fax Problems
Error Code
Solution
3XXX11
Connection to the server failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• Confirm that the network cable is properly connected to
the machine.
• Confirm that the network settings such as IP address,
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
3XXX12
3XXX13
3XXX14
3XXX33
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Confirm
that the network settings such as IP address, DNS, and
SMTP settings have been configured properly (make sure
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail.
Confirm that the network settings such as IP address,
DNS, and SMTP settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
E-mail transmission failed while sending an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the converted TIFF file. Confirm that
the network settings such as IP address, DNS, and SMTP
settings have been configured properly (make sure that
The machine memory reached capacity while sending an
Internet Fax.
• The fax was too large. Resend the document in parts as
several smaller individual faxes, or send at a lower
resolution.
395
9. Troubleshooting
Error Code
Solution
4XXX21
Connection to the server failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• Confirm that the network cable is properly connected to
the machine.
• Confirm that the network settings such as IP address,
DNS, and POP3 settings have been configured properly
(make sure that no double-byte character is used). See
4XXX22
4XXX23
4XXX24
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• LIST command to the POP3 server failed. Ask the sender
to check the e-mail settings.
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the header of the e-mail. Ask the
sender to check the e-mail settings.
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask
the sender to check the e-mail settings.
• The e-mail had an invalid Content-Type, or an
unsupported type of file (such as PDF or JPEG) was
received. Ask the sender to check the file type.
4XXX25
4XXX26
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the text part of the part body of the
e-mail. Ask the sender to check the e-mail settings.
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the received TIFF file (which
resulted from a condition not indicated by the error codes
4XXX43 to 4XXX45). Ask the sender to check the TIFF
file.
4XXX42
E-mail reception failed while receiving an Internet Fax.
• There was an error in the part header of the e-mail. Ask
the sender to check the e-mail settings.
396
Fax Problems
Error Code
Solution
4XXX43
4XXX44
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The compression method of the received TIFF file was
other than MH/MR/MMR. Ask the sender to check the
TIFF file.
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The resolution of the TIFF file was not supported, or the
width of the TIFF file was A3 or B4. Ask the sender to
check the TIFF file.
4XXX45
4XXX46
A TIFF file could not be received via Internet Fax properly.
• The format of the TIFF file was other than TIFF-S/F. Ask
the sender to check the TIFF file.
The machine memory reached capacity while receiving an
Internet Fax.
• The fax was too large. Ask the sender to resend the
document in parts as several smaller individual faxes, or
send at a lower resolution.
When other problems occur
The table below describes how to troubleshoot problems that do not produce an error code.
Problem
Solution
• See the solutions provided for errors 1XXX32 to 1XXX84
in the above table.
• The machine cannot accept a new fax job because there
are 5 unsent faxes in memory already. Wait until any of
those faxes is transmitted completely, or use the [Delete
TX Standby File] function to delete unnecessary faxes. For
Cannot send faxes.
See the solutions provided for errors 2XXX32 to 2XXX84 in the
above table.
Cannot receive faxes.
397
9. Troubleshooting
Problem
Solution
• A print cartridge is empty. Replace the print cartridge.
• The paper tray is empty. Load paper in the paper tray.
Cannot receive faxes even when
sending them is possible.
• If fax reception mode is FAX/TEL Manual mode, you
• The paper tray is empty. Load paper in the paper tray.
Cannot print received faxes.
• The paper tray does not contain paper of the right size.
Load paper of the right size in the paper tray.
Faxes you sent appear spotty or
dirty when received.
• Before placing originals on the exposure glass, make
sure that ink or correction fluid is dry.
A fax you sent appears blank when The original was placed upside down. Place the original in the
received.
The background of received images
is dirty, or images from the rear side
of the originals are visible.
Low room temperature may have caused the machine to scan
originals unclearly. Selecting [Long] for [Scan Warm-up Time]
under system settings may help to improve the scanning
quality.
Faxes you sent come out too light on
the receiving end.
See the solutions provided for errors 1XXX22 to 1XXX23 in the
above table.
Dial fails when trying to send faxes.
398
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
This section describes the meaning of messages that appear on the screen and what to do when a
particular message appears.
Messages are listed in alphabetical order in the table below.
"X" indicates the parts of the messages that appear differently depending on a specific situation, such as
the paper sizes, paper types, or tray names.
Message
Causes
Solutions
• The paper tray was empty. Load
• The tray set for [Select Paper Tray]
under [Fax Features] did not contain
A4, Letter, or Legal size paper. Load
valid size paper in the tray, and
configure the paper size settings
under [System Settings] accordingly.
The machine was not able to
print the received fax, or the
machine's memory reached
capacity while receiving a fax
because the document was too
large.
• A cover or tray was open. Close the
cover or tray.
2XXX14
• There was a paper jam. Remove the
• A print cartridge was empty. Replace
• The received fax was too large. Ask
the sender to resend the document in
parts as several smaller individual
faxes, or to send at a lower
resolution.
ADF Cover Open
Close ADF Cover
The ARDF/ADF cover is open.
• Close the cover completely.
399
9. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
• Remove jammed originals, and then
ADF Orig. Misfeed
Open ADF Cover
and remove paper.
An original has been jammed
inside the ARDF or ADF.
• Check the originals are suitable for
• Specify the tray containing the A4,
Letter, or Legal size paper in the
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter, or
Legal.
Available: 2 Sided
Copy A4/LG/LT
• Specify A4, Letter, or Legal for the
tray selected for printing copies. See
• Set the machine to print copies using
the A4 or Letter size paper in the
ID card copy could not be
performed because the tray
Copy A4 or 8 1/2 x does not contain the valid size
Available: IDCard
11
paper, which are A4 or Letter
size.
• Specify the A4 or Letter size paper for
the tray selected for printing copies.
Fax transmission could not be
completed because the
Busy
Wait for a while and send the fax again.
destination's line was busy.
• Set the machine to print copies using
the A4, Letter, or Legal size paper in
Combined copying could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid size
paper, which are A4, Letter, or
Legal size.
Cannot Copy This
Setting
Comb.: 2 on 1 / 4
on 1
• Specify the A4, Letter, or Legal size
paper for the tray selected for printing
400
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
• Use the ARDF or ADF, even when
copying a single sheet.
Combined copying/2-sided
copying could not be performed
because the originals were not
placed in the ARDF or ADF.
• If you need to use the exposure glass,
turn off combined copying/2-sided
copying in [Duplex/Combine] under
copy settings, and then try again. See
Cannot copy.
Set original to ADF.
The paper size set for the
document differs from the size of
the paper in the indicated tray.
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or
press [JobReset] to cancel the job.
Check Paper Size
Check Paper Type
The paper type set for the
document differs from the type
of the paper in the indicated
tray.
Press [FormFeed] to begin printing, or
press [JobReset] to cancel the job.
• Confirm that the telephone line is
properly connected to the machine.
• Disconnect the telephone line from
the machine, and connect a standard
telephone in its place. Confirm that
you can make calls using the
telephone. If you cannot make calls
this way, contact your telephone
company.
The line could not be connected
correctly.
Connection Failed
Cover open
A cover is open.
Close the cover completely.
• Press a different One Touch button.
No Quick Dial entry is
associated with the One Touch
button you pressed.
Dest. is not
Programmed
• Assign a registered destination to the
401
9. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
• Confirm that the fax number you
dialed is correct.
• Confirm that the destination is a fax
machine.
Dial Failed
The fax could not be sent.
• Confirm that the line is not busy.
• You may need to insert a pause
between dial digits. Press the [Pause/
Redial] key after, for example, the
area code.
• Configure [Resolution] under scanner
settings to reduce the scanning
The scan file exceeds the size
limit for files that can be sent
through e-mail.
Exceeded Max.E-
mail Size
• Configure [Max. E-mail Size] under
scanner settings to increase the
The Scan to USB function failed
Failed to Access File because the machine could not Use a USB flash disk that is not password-
Press Clear key
access the USB flash disk
properly.
or write-protected.
The Scan to USB function failed
because there was not enough
memory on the USB flash disk.
Failed to Create File
Press Clear key
Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.
The number of fax jobs in
Fax Job Memory
Overflow
memory (unsent or unprinted
faxes) has reached maximum,
so new jobs cannot be stored.
Wait until pending jobs have been
transmitted or printed.
• Confirm that the network cable is
properly connected to the machine.
• Confirm that the network settings such
as IP address, DNS, and POP3
Connection to the POP3 server
failed.
I-Fax POP3 fails
settings have been configured
properly (make sure that no double-
402
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
Remove and replace it with a print
cartridge specified by an authorized
dealer.
A non-supported print cartridge
is installed.
Indep.Sply.Prt.Cart.
Paper has been jammed in the
machine.
Internal Misfeed
If several originals are still to be scanned,
it is recommended to start printing now,
and copy the remaining originals
separately. If originals are being scanned
from the ARDF or ADF, remove any
remaining pages from the ARDF or ADF.
Memory has almost reached
capacity during sort copy.
Memory Almost Full
• Select [600 × 600 dpi] in
[Resolution] under [Printer Features]
• The data is too large or
complex to print.
• If using the PCL6 printer driver, set
[Resolution] in [Print Quality] to [600
× 600 dpi]. If using the PostScript 3
printer driver, set [Print Quality:] in
[Graphics] to [600 × 600 dpi].
• If you try to print a Locked
Print file stored in the
machine with the printer
driver's [Resolution] set to
[1200 × 600 dpi] or
higher in the [Print Quality]
tab, printing may be
canceled depending on
the machine's current
memory usage.
Memory Overflow
• Print or delete other Locked Print files
in the machine, and then print the
Locked Print file that the machine
failed to print. Alternately, resend the
Locked Print file to the machine with
[Resolution] set to [600 × 600 dpi],
and then print the Locked Print file.
403
9. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
scanning the first page of
the original to store a fax
job in memory before
transmission.
Resend the fax in parts as several smaller
individual faxes, or send at a lower
resolution.
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
sending a fax via LAN-Fax.
Memory Overflow
• The machine's memory
reached capacity while
storing a fax in memory in
Memory Transmission
mode.
Memory has reached capacity
while scanning the second or
Memory Overflow
Press [TX] to send only the pages that have
TX
later pages of the original when been scanned in memory, or press
trying to send a fax in Memory
Transmission mode.
[Cancel] to cancel.
Cancel
Paper has been jammed in the
bypass tray.
Misfeed: Bypass Tray
Misfeed: Dup. Unit
Remove Paper
Paper has been jammed in the
duplex unit.
Paper has been jammed in the
paper exit area.
Misfeed: Stnd. Tray
Misfeed: Tray 1
Misfeed: Tray 2
Paper has been jammed in the
tray 1 paper input area.
Paper has been jammed in the
tray 2 paper input area.
Connection with the server was
lost while sending or receiving
data.
Net Communication
Error
Contact the network administrator.
404
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
A scanned file could not be sent
because the machine has not
Wait until the machine receives the IP
Network is not Ready received IP address information address information completely, and then
from the DHCP server
completely.
try the operation again.
The machine has been off-hook Put down the handset or press the [Clear/
for an extended period of time. Stop] key.
On Hook or Stop key
Out of Paper: X
paper.
Please Restart
Machine
The machine needs to be
restarted.
Turn off the power, and then turn it back
on.
The print cartridge has not been
installed or has not been
installed correctly.
Print Cart. Set Error
The machine failed to proceed
with the print job, because tray
1 or tray 2 was specified as the Remove paper from the bypass tray.
input tray but paper was set in
Remove Paper:
Bypass Tray
the bypass tray.
Replace Required
Soon:
The print cartridge is almost
Prepare a new print cartridge.
empty.
Print Cartridge
Replacement
Required:
The fusing unit is no longer
usable, and must be replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Fusing Unit
Replacement
Required:
The paper feed roller is no
longer usable, and must be
replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Paper Feed Roller
Replacement
Required:
The machine has run out of
toner.
Print Cartridge
405
9. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
Replacement
Required:
The transfer roller is no longer
usable, and must be replaced.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Transfer Roller
A reception error occurred, and
the fax could not be received
correctly.
If possible, contact the sender of the fax
and ask them to resend it.
RX Comm. Error
A scanned file could not be sent
because the Ethernet cable was
not connected properly.
Scan (NW)
Disconnected
Reconnect the Ethernet cable properly,
and then try the operation again.
The USB cable was
disconnected while scanning
from a computer.
Scan (USB)
Disconnected
Reconnect the USB cable properly, and
then try the operation again.
A scanned file could not be sent
because the destination could
not be reached.
Server Connection
Failed
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
Confirm that the destination is registered
correctly, and then try the operation again.
An error occurred in
communication with the server
before beginning transmission.
Server Response
Error
If the problem could not be solved, contact
the network administrator.
A fatal hardware error has
occurred, and the machine
cannot function.
Contact your sales or service
representative.
Service call - X
While the message is displayed, press the
[OK] key. A menu for changing the paper
size of the current tray appears.
Load A4/Letter/ Legal size paper in the
tray, and then select the corresponding
paper size using [ ][ ] keys and press the
[OK] key. The machine will then print out
the fax.
The tray set for [Select Paper
Tray] under [Fax Features] does
not contain A4, Letter, or Legal
size paper.
Set Correct Paper
Note that the paper size setting for the tray
under system settings will be changed. See
406
Error and Status Messages on the Screen
Message
Causes
Solutions
• Use the ARDF or ADF, even when
scanning A4/Letter or smaller size
originals.
Scanning could not be
Set Original to ADF
performed because the originals
were not placed in the ARDF or
ADF, even though the machine
is set to scan originals larger
than A4/Letter size.
Cannot use exposure
glass
• If you need to use the exposure glass,
set A4/Letter or smaller size in [Scan
Size] under scanner settings, and then
with set. in [Scan
Size].
The machine's memory reached Press [Exit] to print the originals that were
Sort Copy was
Cancelled
capacity while originals were
being scanned from the ARDF
successfully scanned into memory. Then,
copy again the originals left in the ARDF or
or ADF to perform sort copying. ADF.
If the [Auto Redial] setting is enabled, the
machine will redial the number and try
again. If all attempts fail, or if the machine
is in Immediate Transmission mode, the fax
will not be transmitted. Try the operation
again.
A transmission error occurred,
and the fax could not be
transmitted correctly.
TX Comm. Error
2-sided copy could not be
performed because the tray
does not contain the valid type
paper, which are thin, plain,
recycled, color, preprinted,
prepunched, thick paper 1, or
letterhead.
• Specify the tray containing the valid
type paper in the [Select Paper]
Unavailable Paper
Type
• Specify the valid paper type for the
tray selected for printing copies. See
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Unsupported Device
Please Remove
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Unsupported Device
Press Clear key
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
407
9. Troubleshooting
Message
Causes
Solutions
The Scan to USB function failed
because a USB device other
than a USB flash disk or a USB
flash disk with an unsupported
file system was used.
Unsupported USB
Hub Please Remove
Use a USB flash disk that is compatible
with the Scan to USB function.
The Scan to USB function failed Check that the USB flash disk is securely
because the USB flash disk was inserted in the machine. Do not pull out the
USB Disconnected
Press Clear key
removed before the operation
could be completed.
USB flash disk until "Ready" appears on
the display.
USB Memory
The Scan to USB function failed
Overflow Press Clear because there was not enough
Use a USB flash disk with enough memory.
key
memory on the USB flash disk.
The Scan to USB function failed
Write Protect Press
Clear key
because the machine could not Use a USB flash disk that is not password-
access the USB flash disk
properly.
or write-protected.
408
Replacing the Print Cartridge
Replacing the Print Cartridge
• Do not incinerate toner (new or used) or toner containers. Doing so risks burns. Toner will ignite
on contact with naked flame.
• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers anywhere near naked flames. Doing so
risks fire and burns. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame.
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging.
• Keep the polythene materials (bags, gloves, etc.) supplied with this machine away from
babies and small children at all times. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are
brought into contact with the mouth or nose.
• Do not use the cleaner to suck spilled toner (including used toner). Sucked toner may cause
firing or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the cleaner. However, it is possible
to use the cleaner designed for dust explosion-proof purpose. If toner is spilled over the floor,
sweep up spilled toner slowly and clean remainder with wet cloth.
• Do not crush or squeeze toner containers. Doing so can cause toner spillage, possibly resulting
in dirtying of skin, clothing, and floor, and accidental ingestion.
• Store toner (new or used), toner containers, and components that have been in contact with
toner out of reach of children.
• If toner or used toner is inhaled, gargle with plenty of water and move into a fresh air
environment. Consult a doctor if necessary.
409
9. Troubleshooting
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
clothing. If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wash the stained area with cold water.
Hot water will set the toner into the fabric and make removing the stain impossible.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing toner, avoid getting toner (new or used) on your
skin. If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner or used toner gets into your eyes, flush immediately with large amounts of water. Consult
a doctor if necessary.
• If toner or used toner is swallowed, dilute by drinking a large amount of water. Consult a doctor
if necessary.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Store print cartridge in a cool dark place.
• Actual printable numbers vary depending on image volume and density, number of pages printed
at a time, paper type and size, and environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.
Toner quality degrades over time. Early replacement of the print cartridge might be necessary.
Therefore, we recommend you always keep a new print cartridge ready.
• For good print quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
• The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from the use
of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
Messages on the screen
• Replace the print cartridge when "Replacement Required: Print Cartridge" appears on the
screen.
• Prepare a new print cartridge when "Replace Required Soon: Print Cartridge" appears on the
screen.
410
Replacing the Print Cartridge
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
• Do not expose the print cartridge without its cover to direct sunlight for a long time.
• Do not touch the print cartridge's photo conductor unit.
CMC013
• Do not touch the ID chip on the side of the print cartridge as indicated in the illustration below.
CMC014
• If toner runs out, you cannot print until the print cartridge is replaced.
1. If paper is loaded in the bypass tray, remove the paper and close the bypass tray.
2. Push the side button to open the front cover, and then carefully lower it.
CMF068
411
9. Troubleshooting
3. Carefully pull out the print cartridge horizontally, holding its center.
CMF069
• Do not shake the removed print cartridge. Doing so can cause remaining toner to leak.
• Place the old print cartridge on paper or similar material to avoid dirtying your workspace.
4. Take the new print cartridge out of the box, and then take it out of the plastic bag.
CMC081
5. Place the print cartridge on a flat surface, and then remove the protection sheet.
CMC019
412
Replacing the Print Cartridge
6. Hold the print cartridge and shake it from side to side five or six times.
CMC020
Even distribution of toner within the bottle improves print quality.
7. Slide the print cartridge in horizontally. When the cartridge can go no further, raise it
slightly and push it fully in. Then push down on the cartridge until it clicks into place.
CMF071
8. Carefully push up the front cover until it closes. Be careful not to you’re your fingers.
After closing the front cover, wait until the initial screen is displayed.
CMF072
413
9. Troubleshooting
9. Put the protective sheet you removed in step 5 on the old print cartridge. Then, put the old
print cartridge into the bag, and then put it into the box.
CMC083
• Make sure to cover the old print cartridge with the protective cover for recycling and environmental
purposes.
• Comply with the print cartridge Recycling Program, whereby used print cartridges are collected for
processing. For details, ask your sales or service representative.
414
10. Maintenance
This chapter describes how to maintain the machine.
Cleaning
Cautions to Take When Cleaning
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in this manual. Inside
this machine are high voltage components that are an electric shock hazard and laser
components that could cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any of the
machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or repair.
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so risks burns and electric shock.
Note again that exposure to the laser components inside this machine risks blindness.
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year.
• There are burn marks on the plug.
• The prongs on the plug are deformed.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the plug and consult your dealer or service
representative. Use of the plug could result in fire or electric shock.
• Be sure to disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet at least once a year.
• The power cord's inner wires are exposed, broken, etc.
• The power cord's coating has a crack or dent.
• When bending the power cord, the power turns off and on.
• Part of the power cord becomes hot.
• The power cord is damaged.
• If any of the above conditions exist, do not use the power cord and consult your dealer or
service representative. Use of the power cord could result in fire or electric shock.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
415
10. Maintenance
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and the area around
the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
Clean the machine periodically to maintain high print quality.
Dry wipe the exterior with a soft cloth. If dry wiping is not enough, wipe with a soft, damp cloth that is
wrung out well. If you still cannot remove the stain or grime, use a neutral detergent, wipe over the area
with a well-wrung damp cloth, and then dry wipe the area and allow it to dry.
• To avoid deformation, discoloration, or cracking, do not use volatile chemicals, such as benzine
and thinner, or spray insecticide on the machine.
• If there is dust or grime inside the machine, wipe with a clean, dry cloth.
• You must disconnect the plug from the wall outlet at least once a year. Clean away any dust and
grime from the plug and outlet before reconnecting. Accumulated dust and grime pose a fire
hazard.
• Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small objects to fall inside the machine.
Cleaning the Friction Pad and Paper Feed Roller
If the friction pad or paper feed roller is dirty, a multi-feed or jam might occur. In this case, clean the
friction pad and paper feed roller as follows:
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not pull out the paper tray forcefully. If you do, the tray might fall and cause an injury.
• Do not put your hands inside the machine when the input tray is removed. Some internal parts
become hot and are a burn hazard.
• Do not use chemical cleaning fluids or organic solvents such as thinner or benzine.
1. Turn off the power.
416
Cleaning
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Remove all the cables from the machine.
3. Pull out tray 1 carefully with both hands.
CMF077
Place the tray on a flat surface. If there is paper in the tray, remove it.
4. Wipe the friction pads with a damp cloth.
CMC084
5. Wipe the rubber part of the roller with a soft damp cloth. After that, wipe it with a dry
cloth to remove the moisture.
CMF092
417
10. Maintenance
6. Reload the removed paper into the tray, and then push the tray carefully into the machine
until it clicks into place.
CMF080
7. Insert the plug of the power cord into the wall socket securely. Connect all the interface
cables that were removed.
8. Turn on the power.
• If jams or multi-sheet feeds occur after cleaning the friction pad, contact your sales or service
representative.
• If the optional tray 2 is installed, clean its friction pad and paper feed roller in the same way as you
did for tray 1.
Cleaning the Exposure Glass
The following procedure describes how to clean the exposure glass.
1. Lift the ARDF or ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ARDF or ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
CMF093
418
Cleaning
Cleaning the ARDF or ADF
The following procedure describes how to clean the ARDF or ADF.
1. Lift the ARDF or ADF.
Be careful not to hold the input tray when lifting the ARDF or ADF, for the tray might be damaged.
2. Clean the parts indicated with arrows with a soft damp cloth and then wipe the same
parts with a dry cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
CMF094
419
10. Maintenance
Moving the Machine
This section provides cautions that you must follow when moving the machine both short and long
distances.
• If you have to move the machine when the optional paper tray unit is attached, do not push on
the main unit's top section. Doing so can cause the optional paper tray unit to detach, possibly
resulting in injury.
• The machine weighs approximately 18.4 kg (40.6 lb.). When moving the machine, use the
inset grips on both sides, and lift slowly. The machine will break or cause injury if dropped.
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, always pull the plug, not the cord.
Pulling the cord can damage the power cord. Use of damaged power cords could result in fire
or electric shock.
• When moving the machine after use, do not take out the toner to prevent toner spill inside the
machine.
Repack the machine in its original packing materials when moving it a long distance.
• Be sure to disconnect all cables from the machine before transporting it.
• The machine is a precision piece of machinery. Be sure to handle it carefully when moving it.
• Make sure to move the machine horizontally. Take extra caution when carrying the machine up or
down stairs.
• If tray 2 is installed, remove it from the machine, and move them separately.
• Do not hold onto the tray area when lifting the machine.
420
Moving the Machine
Moving over a Short Distance
• Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the machine.
1. Be sure to check the following points:
• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• All other cables are unplugged from the machine.
2. If tray 2 is installed, remove it.
3. Return the scanning unit inside the machine to its original position using [Scanner
Carriage] under [System Settings].
4. Lift the machine using the inset grips on both sides of the machine, and then move it
horizontally to the place where you want to use it.
CMF034
5. If you have removed tray 2, reinstall it.
• Be sure to hold the machine level while carrying it. To prevent toner from spilling, move the
machine carefully.
Moving over a Long Distance
If you intend to move the machine over a long distance, you must pack it well. Empty all the paper trays,
but do not remove the print cartridge. Take care not to tip or tilt the machine during transit.
• Do not remove the print cartridge when moving the machine.
421
10. Maintenance
1. Be sure to check the following points:
• The power switch is turned off.
• The power cord is unplugged from the wall outlet.
• All other cables are unplugged from the machine.
• All paper trays are empty.
2. If tray 2 is installed, remove it.
3. Return the scanning unit inside the machine to its original position using [Scanner
Carriage] under [System Settings].
• Toner might spill inside the machine if the machine is not kept level during transit.
• For more information about moving the machine, contact your sales or service representative.
422
10. Maintenance
If the Machine is Not Going to Be Used for a
Long Time
If the machine is going to be inactive for a long time, follow the procedure shown here.
• It is dangerous to handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so could result in electric
shock.
• The inside of this machine becomes very hot. Do not touch the parts labeled " " (indicating a
hot surface).
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the
machine, take care that the power cord is not damaged under the machine. Failing to take these
precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
Preparing the Machine for a Long Period of Inactivity
Use this procedure to prepare the machine for a long period of inactivity with its power switch turned off.
Note that not using the following procedure could result in unusual noises when use of this machine is
resumed.
• Do not switch off the machine during printing.
1. Turn off the power switch.
CMF028
424
If the Machine is Not Going to Be Used for a Long Time
2. Pull out the plug from the socket.
CMF097
3. Open the rear cover.
CMF095
4. Lower the levers for printing envelopes on both side to the position indicated with an
envelope mark.
CMF047
425
10. Maintenance
5. Close the rear cover.
CMF076
• This step is not necessary if the machine's power switch is on but the machine has been inactive for
a long time.
Using the Machine Again After It Has Been Inactive for a Long Period
Use the following procedure to start using the machine again after it has been inactive for a long period.
1. Plug in the power cable.
CMF026
426
If the Machine is Not Going to Be Used for a Long Time
2. Open the rear cover.
CMF095
3. Pull up the levers for printing envelopes on both sides to the position indicated with a
paper mark.
CMF096
4. Close the rear cover.
CMF127
427
10. Maintenance
5. Turn the power switch to “ On”.
CMF027
428
10. Maintenance
Consumables
• Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we
recommend that you use only the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.
Print Cartridge
*1
Print cartridge
Average printable number of pages per cartridge
2,500 pages, 5,000 pages
Black
The printable number of pages is based on pages that are compliant with ISO/IEC 19752 and the image
density set as the factory default. ISO/IEC 19752 is an international standard on measurement of printable
pages, set by the International Organization for Standardization.
*1
• If print cartridge is not changed when necessary, printing will become impossible. For easy
replacement, we recommend you purchase and store extra print cartridges.
• The actual number of printable pages varies depending on the image volume and density, number
of pages printed at a time, paper type and paper size used, and environmental conditions such as
temperature and humidity.
• Print cartridge may need to be changed sooner than indicated above due to deterioration over the
period of use.
• Print cartridge (consumable) is not covered by warranty. However, if there is a problem, contact
the store where they were purchased.
• When you first use this machine, use the print cartridge packaged with the machine.
• The supplied cartridge is good for approximately 1,500 pages.
430
11. Appendix
Functions and Network Settings Available in
an IPv6 Environment
The functions and network settings of this machine that are available in an IPv6 environment differ from
those available in an IPv4 environment. Make sure the functions you use are supported in an IPv6
environment, and then configure the necessary network settings.
• For details about specifying the IPv6 settings, see p.287 "Network Settings" or p.330 "Configuring
Available Functions
Print via FTP
Prints documents via FTP using the EPRT and EPSV commands. Windows Vista/7 and an FTP
application that supports IPv6 are required to use these commands.
Printer
Prints documents using the printer driver.
Scan to FTP
Delivers files that have been scanned using the control panel to an FTP server.
Scan to E-mail
Sends files scanned using the control panel via e-mail.
Scan to Folder
Sends files scanned using the control panel to a shared folder on a computer on the network.
This function is not available on Mac OS X.
Network TWAIN Server
Controls the scanning function from a computer on the network, and delivers scanned data to the
computer directly. This function is available only to computers that have a TWAIN-supporting
application. The IP address of the multi-cast group supported by IPv6 is ff12::fb88:1.
Bonjour
Allows the machine to communicate with Bonjour protocol-supported computers on the network.
The IP address of the multi-cast group supported by IPv6 is ff02::fb.
LAN-Fax
Sends a document created in an application as a fax and without printing it.
431
11. Appendix
Web Image Monitor
Allows you to check the machine's status and configure its settings using a Web browser.
Configuration Page
Prints a configuration page that shows you the machine's configuration, IP address, and other
details.
Internet Fax
Transmission and reception of Internet Faxes.
432
Transmission Using IPsec
Transmission Using IPsec
For securer communications, this machine supports the IPsec protocol. When applied, IPsec encrypts
data packets at the network layer using shared key encryption. The machine uses encryption key
exchange to create a shared key for both sender and receiver. To achieve even higher security, you can
also renew the shared key on a validity period basis.
• IPsec is not applied to data obtained through DHCP, DNS, or WINS.
• IPsec compatible operating systems are Windows XP SP2, Windows Vista/7, Windows Server
2003/2003 R2/2008/2008 R2, Mac OS X 10.4.8 and later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux WS 4.0,
and Solaris 10. However, some setting items are not supported depending on the operating
system. Make sure the IPsec settings you specify are consistent with the operating system's IPsec
settings.
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec under
[Admin. Tools] on the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
Encryption and Authentication by IPsec
IPsec consists of two main functions: the encryption function, which ensures the confidentiality of data,
and the authentication function, which verifies the sender of the data and the data's integrity. This
machine's IPsec function supports two security protocols: the ESP protocol, which enables both of the
IPsec functions at the same time, and the AH protocol, which enables only the authentication function.
ESP Protocol
The ESP protocol provides secure transmission through both encryption and authentication. This
protocol does not provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
433
11. Appendix
AH Protocol
The AH protocol provides secure transmission through authentication of packets only, including
headers.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
AH Protocol + ESP Protocol
When combined, the ESP and AH protocols provide secure transmission through both encryption
and authentication. These protocols provide header authentication.
• For successful encryption, both the sender and receiver must specify the same encryption
algorithm and encryption key. The encryption algorithm and encryption key are specified
automatically.
• For successful authentication, the sender and receiver must specify the same authentication
algorithm and authentication key. The authentication algorithm and authentication key are
specified automatically.
• Some operating systems use the term "Compliance" in place of "Authentication".
Security Association
This machine uses encryption key exchange as the key setting method. With this method, agreements
such as the IPsec algorithm and key must be specified for both sender and receiver. Such agreements
form what is known as an SA (Security Association). IPsec communication is possible only if the
receiver's and sender's SA settings are identical.
The SA settings are auto configured on both parties' machines. However, before the IPsec SA can be
established, the ISAKMP SA (Phase 1) settings must be auto configured. When this is done, the IPsec SA
(Phase 2) settings, which allow actual IPsec transmission, will be auto configured.
Also, for further security, the SA can be periodically auto updated by applying a validity period (time
limit) for its settings. This machine only supports IKEv1 for encryption key exchange.
Multiple settings can be configured in the SA.
Settings 1-10
You can configure ten separate sets of SA details (such as different shared keys and IPsec
algorithms).
IPsec policies are searched through one by one, starting at [No.1].
434
Transmission Using IPsec
Encryption Key Exchange Settings Configuration Flow
This section explains the procedure for specifying encryption key exchange settings.
Machine
PC
1. Set the same IPsec settings as the machine on
PC.
1. Set the IPsec settings on Web Image Monitor.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
2. Enable IPsec settings.
3. Confirm IPsec transmission.
• After configuring IPsec, you can use "ping" command to check if the connection is established
correctly. Because the response is slow during initial key exchange, it may take some time to
confirm that transmission has been established.
• If you cannot access Web Image Monitor due to IPsec configuration problems, disable IPsec on
the control panel, and then access Web Image Monitor.
• For details about disabling IPsec using the control panel, see p.438 "Enabling and Disabling IPsec
Specifying Encryption Key Exchange Settings
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [IPsec Settings].
3. Click the [IPsec Policy List] tab.
4. Select the number of the setting you want to modify in the list, and then click [Change].
5. Modify the IPsec related settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
7. Click the [IPsec Global Settings] tab, and then select [Active] in [IPsec Function].
8. If necessary, specify [Default Policy], [Broadcast and Multicast Bypass], and [All ICMP
Bypass] also.
9. Enter the administrator password, and then click [Apply].
435
11. Appendix
Specifying IPsec Settings on the Computer
Specify exactly the same settings for IPsec SA settings on your computer as are specified for the IPsec
Settings on the machine. Setting methods differ according to the computer's operating system. The
following procedure is based on Windows 7 in an IPv4 environment as an example.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then click
[Administrative Tools].
2. Double-click [Local Security Policy], and then click [IP Security Policies on Local
Computer].
3. In the "Action" menu, click [Create IP Security Policy...].
The IP Security Policy Wizard appears.
4. Click [Next].
5. Enter a security policy name in "Name", and then click [Next].
6. Clear the "Activate the default response rule (earlier versions of Windows only)." check
box, and then click [Next].
7. Select "Edit properties", and then click [Finish].
8. In the "General" tab, click [Settings...].
9. In "Authenticate and generate a new key after every", enter the same validity period (in
minutes) that is specified on the machine in [IKE Life Time], and then click [Methods...].
10. Confirm that the Encryption Algorithm ("Encryption"), Hash Algorithm ("Integrity"), and
IKE Diffie-Hellman Group ("Diffie-Hellman Group") settings in "Security method
preference order" all match those specified on the machine in [IKE Settings].
If the settings are not displayed, click [Add...].
11. Click [OK] twice.
12. Click [Add...] in the "Rules" tab.
The Security Rule Wizard appears.
13. Click [Next].
14. Select "This rule does not specify a tunnel", and then click [Next].
15. Select the type of network for IPsec, and then click [Next].
16. Click [Add...] in the IP Filter List.
17. In [Name], enter an IP Filter name, and then click [Add...].
The IP Filter Wizard appears.
18. Click [Next].
436
Transmission Using IPsec
19. In [Description:], enter a name or a detailed explanation of the IP filter, and then click
[Next].
You may click [Next] and proceed to the next step without entering any information in this field.
20. Select "My IP Address" in "Source address", and then click [Next].
21. Select "A specific IP Address or Subnet" in "Destination address", enter the machine's IP
address, and then click [Next].
22. For the IPsec protocol type, select "Any", and then click [Next].
23. Click [Finish], and then click [OK].
24. Select the IP filter that you have just created, and then click [Next].
25. Click [Add...] in the Filter Action.
The Filter Action Wizard appears.
26. Click [Next].
27. In [Name], enter a Filter Action name, and then click [Next].
28. Select "Negotiate security", and then click [Next].
29. Select one of options for computers allowed to communicate with, and then click [Next].
30. Select "Custom" and click [Settings...].
31. When [ESP] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select
[Data integrity and encryption (ESP)], and configure the following settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for ESP]
specified on the machine.
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] to the same value as the [Encryption Algorithm for ESP]
specified on the machine.
32. When [AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings], select
[Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following
settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] to the same value as the [Authentication Algorithm for AH]
specified on the machine.
Clear the [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] check box.
33. When [ESP&AH] is selected for the machine in [Security Protocol] under [IPsec Settings],
select [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)], and configure the following
settings:
Set the value of [Integrity algorithm] under [Data and address integrity without encryption (AH)] to
the same value as [Authentication Algorithm for AH] specified on the machine.
Set the value of [Encryption algorithm] under [Data integrity and encryption (ESP)] to the same
value as [Encryption Algorithm for ESP] specified on the machine.
437
11. Appendix
34. In the Session key settings, select "Generate a new key every", and enter the same
validity period (in seconds or Kbytes) as that specified for [Life Time] on the machine.
35. Click [OK], and then click [Next].
36. Click [Finish].
If you are using IPv6 under Windows Vista or a newer version of Windows, you must repeat this
procedure from step 12 and specify ICMPv6 as an exception. When you reach step 22, select
[58] as the protocol number for the "Other" target protocol type, and then set [Negotiate security]
to [Permit].
37. Select the filter action that you have just created, and then click [Next].
38. Select one of options for an authentication method, and then click [Next].
39. Click [Finish], and then click [OK] twice.
The new IP security policy (IPsec settings) is specified.
40. Select the security policy that you have just created, right click on it, and then click
[Assign].
IPsec settings on the computer are enabled.
• To disable the computer's IPsec settings, select the security policy, right click, and then click [Un-
assign].
Enabling and Disabling IPsec Using the Control Panel
1. Press the [User Tools] key.
2. Press the [ ][ ] key to select [Admin. Tools], and then press the [OK] key.
3. If you are requested to enter a password, enter the password using the number keys,
and then press the [OK] key.
4. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [IPsec], and then press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Active] or [Inactive], and then press the [OK] key.
6. Press the [Clear/Stop] key to return to the initial screen.
• A password for accessing the [Admin. Tools] menu can be specified in [Admin. Tools Lock].
• You can press the [Escape] key to exit to the previous level of the menu tree.
438
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address
Search Functions
By configuring the LDAP settings, you will be able to use the LDAP authentication and address search
functions.
LDAP authentication
LDAP authentication enables you to prevent unauthorized access to the machine, by limiting its use
to users who can log in to the machine with correct login user names and passwords.
The table below shows the functions that require users to log in and functions that will be disabled
under LDAP authentication.
Function
Details
Without logging in, users can only check supplies status.
The user must log in to the machine from the control panel.
• Entering the [User Tools] menu
• Copier function
• Scanner function
• Fax function
No operation is possible without logging in.
The user must log in to the machine from the control panel.
• Printing (using the PCL6 printer
driver)
No job will be processed without logging in.
The user must log in to the machine from the printer, LAN-
Fax, or TWAIN driver.
• Sending faxes via LAN-Fax
• TWAIN scanning
• Printing (using the PostScript 3
printer driver)
Will be disabled at all times.
• WIA scanning
LDAP address search
LDAP address search allows you to retrieve addresses from the server when using the scanner or
fax functions.
• LDAP authentication and user restriction settings can be used in combination, except for printing
using the PCL6 printer driver and sending LAN-Faxes. Under LDAP authentication, users will only
be able to authenticate for PCL6 printing and LAN-Faxes using user names and passwords for the
LDAP server, not user codes for the user restriction settings.
439
11. Appendix
• For details about user restriction settings, see p.125 "Restricting Machine Functions According to
Programming the LDAP Server
This section describes how to specify the LDAP server settings.
Use Web Image Monitor to program the LDAP server settings.
Operational requirements
To program the LDAP server settings, the following requirements must be met:
• The network configuration must allow the machine to detect the presence of the LDAP server.
• When SSL is being used, TLSv1 or SSLv2 can function on the LDAP server.
• The LDAP server must be registered in the machine.
• This machine does not support LDAPv2.
• For details about individual items related to LDAP server settings, see p.341 "Configuring the LDAP
Programming the LDAP server
This section describes how to program the LDAP server.
• Enter the user's login user name using up to 128 characters, and then enter the user's login
password using up to 128 characters.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
440
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions
2. Click [LDAP Settings].
3. Under "LDAP Authentication", select [Active] for [Authentication] to enable LDAP
authentication.
If necessary, also configure [Auto Logout Time (seconds)].
4. Enter the administrator password if required.
5. Click [Apply].
6. Click [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
7. Select [Active] for [LDAP Search] to enable LDAP address search.
If necessary, also configure [LDAP Search Timeout].
8. Under "Program/Change/Delete", select the LDAP server you want to configure, and
then click [Change].
"Edit LDAP Server" page appears.
9. Enter the server’s name in [Identification Name (Required)].
10. Enter the server's host name or IP address in [Server Name (Required)].
11. Enter the position within the LDAP directory's structure from which to start user searches in
[Search Base (Required)].
For example, if the search target is the sales department of ABC company, enter "dc=sales
department, o=ABC". (In this example, the description is for an active directory. "dc" is for the
organization unit, and "o" is for the company.)
441
11. Appendix
Search base registration may be required depending on your server environment. When
registration is required, unspecified searches will result in error.
Check your server environment and enter any required specifications.
12. Enter the port number used to connect to the LDAP server in [Port Number (Required)].
Specify a port according to your environment.
13. Select whether or not to use SSL with the LDAP server in [SSL].
Select [SSL] to encrypt communication between the machine and LDAP server; select [Inactive] for
communication without encryption.
The port number will automatically change depending on this setting: it will be 389 when set to
[None], or 636 when set to [SSL].
14. Select the authentication method in [Authentication].
Authentication setting must comply with your server's authentication settings. Check your server
settings before setting this machine.
If you select [Active], authentication is Cleartext, in which a password is sent to the LDAP server
without any encryption processing.
If you select [High Security], authentication is CRAM-MD5.
If [Active] or [High Security] is selected, you must proceed to the next steps to set [Login Name
Attribute], [User Name (Optional)], and [Password (Optional)].
15. Enter the user name prefix or login name attribute of Bind DN, such as “uid” or “cn” in
[Login Name Attribute].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment.
16. Enter the user name to log in to the LDAP server in [User Name (Optional)].
17. Enter the password to log in to the LDAP server in [Password (Optional)].
18. Select the character code the LDAP server uses for [Japanese Character Code Set
(Required)].
19. Click the [Start] button for connection test.
Access the LDAP server to check that the proper connection is established. Check authentication
works according to the authentication settings.
20. Confirm the result of the connection test.
If the connection test fails, check your settings and try again.
This function does not check search conditions or the search base.
21. Under "Search Conditions", enter an attribute type by which the user can be distinguished
in the following: [Identification Name (Required)], [Email Address (Required)], [Fax
Number (Required)], [Company Name (Required)], and [Department Name (Required)].
You can enter an attribute as a typical search keyword. Using the entered attribute, the function
searches the LDAP server's Address Book.
442
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions
22. Under "Search Options", enter an attribute type by which the user can be distinguished in
[Attribute (Optional)].
The attribute value may change depending on the server environment.
23. Enter the name shown on the machine's control panel, which is used for LDAP search to
search a user based on the attribute type specified in [Attribute (Optional)], in [Key
Display (Optional)].
24. Enter the administrator password if required.
25. Click [Apply].
26. Close the Web browser.
Changing the LDAP server
This section describes how to change the programmed LDAP server.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [LDAP Settings].
3. Click [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
4. Under "Program/Change/Delete", select the LDAP server you want to change, and then
click [Change].
"Edit LDAP Server" page appears.
5. Change the settings as necessary.
6. Enter the administrator password if required.
7. Click [Apply].
8. Close the Web browser.
Deleting the LDAP server
This section describes how to delete the programmed LDAP server.
1. Start the Web browser, and access the machine by entering its IP address.
2. Click [LDAP Settings].
3. Click [Program/Change/Delete LDAP Server].
4. Under "Program/Change/Delete", select the LDAP server you want to delete, and then
click [Delete].
Current configuration of the selected LDAP server appears.
5. Enter the administrator password if required.
6. Click [Apply].
443
11. Appendix
7. Close the Web browser.
When LDAP Authentication is Specified
When LDAP authentication is specified, only the users who can log in to the machine with correct user
name and password can use the machine.
If you want to enter the [User Tools] menu or use the copier, scanner, or fax functions, you must enter a
valid user name and password to log in to the machine. When you are finished with using the machine,
be sure to log out to prevent unauthorized users from using the machine.
If you want to print using the PCL6 printer driver, send LAN-Faxes, or perform TWAIN scanning, you
must log in to the machine through respective drivers.
• If [Auto Logout Time (seconds)] under LDAP settings is specified with Web Image Monitor, the
machine automatically logs you off if you do not use the control panel within a given time.
• You will not need to log out from the machine if you logged in through printer, LAN-Fax, or TWAIN
driver.
• Under LDAP authentication, PostScript 3 printing and WIA scanning will always be disabled.
Logging in using the control panel
Use the following procedure to log in to the machine using the control panel.
1. In [User Name:], enter the user name (up to 128 characters).
2. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Password:], and then enter the password using the
number keys (up to 128 characters).
3. Press the [OK] key.
If authentication is successful, the initial screen of the priority function will be displayed.
Logging out using the control panel
When you are finished with using the machine, be sure to log out to prevent unauthorized users from
using the machine.
444
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions
1. Press [Logout] in the standby screen.
2. Press [Yes].
Logging in using the printer, LAN-Fax, TWAIN driver
When LDAP authentication is specified, make sure the user authentication settings are made on the
printer, LAN-Fax, or TWAIN driver.
• To configure printer or LAN-Fax driver’s default settings, log on using an account that has Manage
Printers permission. Members of the Administrators group have Manage Printers permission by
default.
• You cannot change the printer or LAN-Fax driver’s default settings for each user. Settings
configured in the properties dialog box are applied to all users. Procedures and screens might vary
depending on the operating system you are using.
• The following procedure is based on Windows 7 as an example. If you are using another
operating system, the procedure might vary slightly.
• You can log in to the machine through the TWAIN driver only when using a computer running a
Windows operating system.
PCL6 printer driver, LAN-Fax driver
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right click the icon of the printer you want to use, and then click [Printer properties].
3. Click the [Advanced Options] tab.
4. Select the [User Authentication] (PCL6 printer driver) or [User authentication] (LAN-Fax
driver) check box.
5. Click [Apply].
6. Click the [General] tab, and then click [Preferences...].
7. Click [Authentication...] on the [Valid Access] tab (PCL6 printer driver) or [Authentication]
(LAN-Fax driver).
8. In a dialog box that appears, enter the login user name (up to 128 characters) and login
password (up to 128 characters).
With the PCL6 printer driver, you need to enter the same password for confirmation.
9. Click [OK] three times.
TWAIN driver
1. Perform the scanning operation.
445
11. Appendix
2. In a dialog box that appears, enter the login user name (up to 128 characters) and login
password (up to 128 characters).
3. Click [OK].
Specifying the LDAP Address Search Conditions
LDAP address search allows you to retrieve addresses from the server when using the scanner or fax
functions.
To search for specific destinations from the programmed LDAP servers, you can configure search
conditions using the control panel.
• To configure the search conditions, [LDAP Search] must be enabled under the LDAP server settings
of Web Image Monitor.
1. Press the [Scanner] key or [Facsimile] key.
CMF132
CMF133
446
Using the LDAP Authentication and Address Search Functions
2. Press the [Address Book] key.
CMF140
3. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search LDAP], and then press the [OK] key.
4. To select a specific LDAP server, press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Select Server], and then
press the [OK] key.
5. Press the [ ][ ] keys to select the desired LDAP server, and then press the [OK] key.
6. To specify specific search conditions, press the [ ][ ] keys to select [Search Condition],
and then press the [OK] key.
7. Press the [ ][ ] keys to scroll through the list of search options, press [ ] to select the
desired item, and then press the [OK] key.
You can select [Identification Name], [Email Address], [Fax Number], [Company Name],
[Department Name], or any other item you have defined in [Key Display (Optional)] under "Search
Options" using Web Image Monitor.
To deselect a search option, press [ ] again.
8. Enter a string of characters that will be used for searching using the number keys, and
then press the [OK] key.
9. Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] keys to select the search criteria, and then press the [OK] key.
• [Include]: Search for strings that include the specified string.
Example: To search for “ABC”, enter “A”, “B”, or “C”.
• [First Word]: Search for strings that start with the specified string.
Example: To search for “ABC”, enter “A”.
• [Exact Match]: Search for strings that fully match the specified string.
Example: To search for “ABC”, enter “ABC”.
• [Exclude]: Search for strings that do not include the specified string.
Example: To search for “ABC”, enter “D”.
• [Last Word]: Search for strings that end with the specified string.
Example: To search for “ABC”, enter “C”.
• [Fuzzy Search]: Search for strings that are close to the specified string.
447
11. Appendix
The result of fuzzy search depends on the search method implemented in the LDAP server.
To specify more search options, return to step 7.
10. Press the [User Tools] key to return to the initial screen.
• If you perform LDAP address search without any specific search conditions, the search result will
contain all destinations registered in the LDAP servers.
448
Specifications of the Machine
Specifications of the Machine
This section lists the machine's specifications.
General Function Specifications
Configuration
Desktop
Print process
Laser electrostatic transfer
Maximum paper size for scanning
• Exposure glass
1
A4, Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
• ARDF/ADF
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 ")
2
Maximum paper size for printing
1
Legal (8 / " × 14 ")
2
Warm-up time
Less than 30 seconds (23 °C, 71.6 °F)
Paper sizes
• Standard paper sizes
A4, B5 JIS, A5, A6, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 "), Half Letter (5 / " × 8 /
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
"), Executive (7 / " × 10 / "), 8 " × 13 ", B6 JIS, 8 / " × 13 ", Folio (8 / " × 13 "), 16K
4
2
2
7
4
1
1
1
(195 × 267 mm), Com 10 (4 / "×9 / "), Monarch (3 / " × 7 / "), C5 Env (162 × 229
8
2
8
2
mm), C6 Env (114 × 162 mm), DL Env (110 × 220 mm)
• Custom size
• Tray 1
100 to 216 mm (3.94 to 8.50 inches) in width, 148 to 356 mm (5.83 to 14.02 inches)
in length
• Bypass Tray
90 to 216 mm (3.54 to 8.50 inches) in width, 140 to 356 mm (5.51 to 14.02 inches) in
length
• Duplex supported paper sizes
1
1
A4, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 ")
2
2
449
11. Appendix
2
Paper output capacity (80 g/m , 20 lb.)
Standard 125 sheets
2
Paper input capacity (80 g/m , 20 lb.)
• Tray 1
250 sheets
• Tray 2 (option)
250 sheets
• Bypass tray
50 sheets
ARDF/ADF capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
• ARDF
50 sheets
• ADF
35 sheets
Paper weight
• Tray 1
2
52 to 162 g/m (14 to 43.1 lb.)
• Tray 2 (option)
2
60 to 105 g/m (16.0 to 28.0 lb.)
• Bypass tray
2
52 to 162 g/m (14 to 43.1 lb.)
Memory
128 MB
Power requirements
•
220-240 V, 5 A, 50/60 Hz (when fully equipped)
•
120 V, 10 A, 60 Hz (when fully equipped)
Power consumption
• Maximum power consumption
: 895 W
: 850 W
• Energy Saver mode 1
450
Specifications of the Machine
70 W
• Energy Saver mode 2
10 W
Machine dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)
• Type 2 model
*1
*1
420 × 397 × 463 mm (16.6 × 15.7 × 18.3 inches)
• Type 1 model
*1
*1
420 × 397 × 442 mm (16.6 × 15.7 × 17.4 inches)
If tray 2 is installed, the height increases by 89 mm (3.5 inches).
*1
Weight (machine body with consumables)
• Type 2 model
Approximately 18.4 kg (40.6 lb.)
• Type 1 model
Approximately 16.9 kg (37.3 lb.)
Printer Function Specifications
Printing speed (600 dpi)
28 pages per minute (A4)/30 pages per minute (Letter)
Resolution
600 dpi (Maximum: 1200 × 1200 dpi)
First print speed
8 seconds or less (A4/Letter, 600 × 600 dpi)
Interface
• Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)
• USB 2.0
Printer language
PCL6, PostScript 3
Fonts
80 fonts
Network protocol
TCP/IP, IPP
451
11. Appendix
Copier Function Specifications
Maximum resolution (scanning and printing)
• Exposure glass
Scanning: 600 × 600 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
• ARDF/ADF
Scanning: 600 × 300 dpi
Printing: 600 × 600 dpi
Gradation
Scanning: 256 levels (1 dot)
Printing: Two-value (1 dot)
First copy speed (A4/Letter, at 25 °C, 77 °F)
12 seconds or less
Multiple copy speed
28 pages per minute
Reproduction ratio
•
Fixed ratio: 50%, 71%, 82%, 93%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Zoom ratio: 25 to 400% (600 × 300 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi)
•
Fixed ratio: 50%, 65%, 78%, 93%, 129%, 155%, 200%, 400%
Zoom ratio: 25 to 400% (600 × 300 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi)
Copy quantity
99
Scanner Function Specifications
Maximum scanning area (horizontal × vertical)
• Exposure glass
216 × 297 mm (8.5 × 11.7 inches)
• ARDF/ADF
216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14.1 inches)
452
Specifications of the Machine
Maximum resolution when scanning from the control panel (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan
to Folder, Scan to USB)
• Exposure glass
600 × 600 dpi
• ARDF/ADF
600 × 600 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a computer (TWAIN)
• Exposure glass
19200 × 19200 dpi
• ARDF/ADF
600 × 600 dpi
Maximum resolution when scanning from a computer (WIA)
• Exposure glass
600 × 600 dpi
• ARDF/ADF
600 × 600 dpi
Gradation
Input: 16 bit color processing
Output: 8 bit color processing
Scanning time (600 dpi)
Black and white: 5 seconds or less
Color: 10 seconds or less
Not including transfer time.
ARDF/ADF throughput (300 dpi)
Black and white: 120 mm per second
Color: 60 mm per second
Interface
• Scanning from the control panel
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), USB2.0 (Scan to USB)
• Scanning from a computer
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX), USB 2.0
Sendable file formats
TIFF, JPEG, PDF
453
11. Appendix
Address book
Maximum 100 items
Number of redials: 1
Fax Function Specifications
Fax transmission and reception
Access line
• Public switched telephone networks (PSTN)
• Private branch exchange (PBX)
Transmission mode
ITU-T Group 3 (G3)
Scan line density
8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 × 100 dpi)
8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 × 200 dpi)
Transmission time
3–4 seconds (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm, 33.6 kbps, MMR, ITU-T # 1 chart)
Transfer rate
33.6 kbps to 2400 bps (auto shift down system)
Data compression method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Memory capacity
More than 100 sheets (8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm)
Address book
• Speed dial
200 items
• Quick dial
20 items
• Number of redials for Fax
1
454
Specifications of the Machine
Internet Fax transmission and reception
Interface
Ethernet (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)
Communication protocols
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, TCP/IP
Transmission function
E-mail
E-mail format
Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
Attached file forms (transmission): TIFF-S (MH encoding)
Attached file forms (reception): TIFF-S/TIFF-F (MH/MR/MMR encoding)
Authentication method
SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Original size
A4 (Length is up to 356 mm)
Scan line density
8 dots per mm × 3.85 line per mm (200 × 100 dpi)
8 dots per mm × 7.7 line per mm (200 × 200 dpi)
Destination machine specifications
• Communication protocols
• Transmission
SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception
POP3, TCP/IP
• E-mail format
• Format
MIME, Base64
• Content-Type
Image/tiff
Multipart/mixed (text/plain, Image/tiff (attached file forms))
455
11. Appendix
• Data format
• Profile
TIFF-S
• Encoding
MH
• Original size
A4
• Resolution (dpi)
200 × 100, 200 × 200
456
Specifications of Options
Specifications of Options
This section lists the specifications of the various options.
Paper Feed Unit TK1080
Paper capacity
250 sheets
Paper size
1
1
1
1
A4, B5 JIS, A5, Legal (8 / " × 14 "), Letter (8 / " × 11 "), Half Letter (5 / " × 8 / ")
2
2
2
2
Dimensions (Width × Depth × Height)
420 × 397 × 89 mm (16.6 × 15.6 × 3.5 inches)
Paper weight
2
60 to 105 g/m (16.0 to 28.0 lb.)
Weight
Less than 2.4 kg (5.3 lb.)
457
11. Appendix
Electromagnetic Interference
If this machine is located close to another electronic device, both devices may malfunction due to
electromagnetic interference.
Televisions and radios may produce noise if located too close to this machine. If this happens, do the
following:
• Move the television or radio as far as possible from the machine.
• Change the position of the antenna of the television or radio.
• Use a different wall outlet on a different circuit.
458
Copyright Information about Installed Applications
Copyright Information about Installed
Applications
expat
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Centre, Ltd. and Clark Cooper.
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
JPEG LIBRARY
• The software installed on this product is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
OpenLDAP 2.1
http://www.openldap.org/software/download
The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation ("Software"), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices, this list
of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution, and
459
11. Appendix
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time.
Each revision is distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license
revision or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE
AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission. Title to copyright
in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA.
All Rights Reserved.
Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
OpenSSL 0.9.8g
http://www.openssl.org/source
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually
both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact [email protected].
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
460
Copyright Information about Installed Applications
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission,
please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL"
appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution
is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
461
11. Appendix
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the
parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or
textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution
licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
462
Trademarks
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
®
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
®
LINUX is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries.
®
®
®
®
®
Microsoft , Windows , Windows Server , Windows Vista , and Internet Explorer are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
®
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
"Presto! PageManager" and "NewSoft" are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of NewSoft
Technology Corporation subject to trademark protection of domestic trademark laws and international
trademark conventions.
Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
®
®
The proper name of Internet Explorer 6 is Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows XP are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Business
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
®
®
Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Starter
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Professional
463
11. Appendix
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate
®
®
Microsoft Windows 7 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2003 R2 are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Datacenter Edition
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Foundation
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Datacenter
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 for Itanium-based Systems
®
®
Microsoft Windows Web Server 2008
®
®
Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Foundation
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Datacenter
®
®
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 for Itanium-based Systems
®
®
Microsoft Windows Web Server 2008 R2
®
®
Microsoft Windows HPC Server 2008 R2
®
• PostScript 3 in this manual stands for "Adobe PostScript 3 Emulation".
464
INDEX
Community...........................................................335
Compression (Colour)........................................264
Confidential document........................................139
Configuration page...........................291, 292, 351
Consumables.......................................................430
Control panel............................................36, 37, 39
Copier function.............................................26, 452
Copier mode.......................................................151
Copy key.................................................39, 59, 151
Copy settings.......................................................257
Copyright information.........................................459
Counter information............................................314
Country................................................................298
Cover for the exposure glass.........................36, 37
Cover sheet.................................................235, 236
2-sided copy.................................................26, 158
2-sided copy (manual).......................................169
A
Address book..............................................175, 277
Address book (LAN-Fax)........226, 227, 228, 229,
Address Book key..................................................39
ADF (Auto Document Feeder)....37, 117, 121, 419
Adjust sound volume...........................................279
Admin. tools lock.................................................298
Administrator e-mail address.............................353
Administrator password......................................353
Administrator settings.................................298, 353
Alert indicator........................................................39
D
ARDF (Auto Reverse Document Feeder)....36, 117,
Date and time settings.........................................357
Date setting.........................................201, 298, 357
Default settings....................................................354
Delete TX standby file.........................................270
Density......................170, 192, 222, 258, 264, 268
Density key.............................................................39
Destinations..........................................................203
DHCP...............................................................70, 73
Dial/Push phone.................................................298
Disposal...............................................................423
DNS setting..........................................................333
Document type....................................................171
Duplex..................................................................314
Duplex/Combine................................................258
Authentication......................................................433
Authorized reception................248, 249, 320, 328
Auto continue.......................................................279
Auto document feeder..........................................15
Auto e-mail notification settings.........................334
Auto redial...........................................................268
Auto reverse document feeder.............................15
B
Backup settings....................................................355
Bidirectional communication.....................131, 132
Bond paper............................................................86
Broadcast.............................................................218
Bypass tray.............................................36, 37, 108
Bypass tray setting priority.................................318
E
E-mail notification 1............................................334
E-mail notification 2............................................334
Electromagnetic interference..............................458
Encryption............................................................433
Encryption key exchange...................................435
Energy saver mode..............................60, 298, 358
Enlarged copy..............................................26, 156
Envelope........................................................86, 110
Error messages....................................................399
Escape key.............................................................39
Ethernet..........................................................66, 287
C
Cancel fax...................................................213, 234
Cancel print job..........................................137, 138
Cardstock...............................................................86
Characters...........................................................123
Cleaning....................................415, 416, 418, 419
Clear/Stop key.....................................................39
Color paper...........................................................86
Combined copy............................................26, 158
Communication settings......................................270
465
Ethernet port....................................................38, 66
Ethernet speed.......................................................75
expat....................................................................459
Exposure glass...............................36, 37, 119, 418
Extender for the ADF tray.....................................37
Extender for the ARDF output tray........................36
Exterior......................................................36, 37, 38
External telephone...............................34, 220, 221
External telephone connector...............................38
H
How to read this manual.......................................15
I
I/O timeout.................................................279, 325
ID card copy.................................................28, 167
IKE settings...........................................................346
Image density......................................................279
Image quality.......................................................171
Image Quality key.................................................39
Immediate transmission.......................................209
Immediate TX.......................................................268
Initial setup.............................................................58
Input tray for the ADF............................................37
Input tray for the ARDF..........................................36
Inquiry..................................................................429
Installing the machine............................................43
Interior....................................................................39
Internet Fax.........................................210, 243, 455
Internet Fax settings.............................................339
IP address...............................................16, 70, 287
IPsec.....................................................................298
IPsec global settings............................................345
IPsec policy settings.............................................346
IPsec settings...............................................345, 346
IPsec transmission................................................433
IPv4 configuration...............................................287
IPv6 configuration...............................................287
IPv6 environment.................................................431
IPv6 settings.........................................................331
F
Facsimile key..........................................39, 59, 199
Fax destinations......203, 204, 205, 206, 208, 214,
Fax feature settings.............................................270
Fax function...................................................33, 454
Fax journal.........................................291, 295, 351
Fax mode.............................................................199
Fax number confirmation...........................298, 320
Fax only mode.....................................................242
Fax printing..........................................................246
Fax received file processing...............................320
Fax Received indicator.........................................39
Fax reception.......................................................240
Fax Speed Dial Dest...........................................277
Fax Speed Dial destination list..................291, 351
Fax transmission..........................................209, 211
Fax transmission settings.....................................267
Fax TX/RX standby file list..................................351
FAX/TAD mode..................................................243
FAX/TEL automatic mode...................................242
FAX/TEL manual mode.......................................241
Feature highlights..................................................24
File type................................................................264
Forwarding..........................................................244
Friction pad..........................................................416
Front cover.......................................................36, 37
Function priority............................................59, 298
J
JPEG LIBRARY......................................................459
L
Label paper............................................................86
LAN-Fax.......................................34, 226, 233, 237
LAN-Fax driver properties..................................238
Language....................................................298, 312
Laws and regulations............................................17
LDAP address search.........................186, 217, 439
LDAP address search conditions........................446
LDAP authentication...........................439, 444, 445
LDAP authentication settings...............................341
G
G3 (analog) line interface connector..................38
Gateway..............................................................287
General status.....................................................330
Group (LAN-Fax)................................................229
466
LDAP server........................................341, 440, 443 Network print setting...........................................332
LDAP settings......................................341, 440, 443 Network printer.....................................................80
LED lamps...............................................................67 Network settings............................70, 72, 287, 330
Legal prohibition....................................................17 Network status.....................................................330
Legal size.............................................................100 Note.......................................................................15
Letterhead..............................................................86 Notice.....................................................................14
Limitless scan........................................................264 Number keys..........................................................39
List of option...........................................................20
O
List/Test print.......................................................304
OHP transparencies..............................................86
Lists...............................................................291, 351
OK key...................................................................39
Loading paper......................................96, 105, 108
On Hook Dial......................................................220
Locked Print.........................25, 139, 140, 141, 142
On Hook Dial key.................................................39
Log in...........................................................444, 445
One Touch buttons...............................39, 185, 214
Log out.................................................................444
OpenLDAP...........................................................459
Long period of inactivity.............................424, 426
OpenSSL..............................................................460
Low humidity mode.............................................279
Operation modes..................................................59
Options..........................................................81, 457
M
Mac OS X...................................................132, 134 Original....................117, 119, 194, 224, 264, 268
Machine information...........................................316 Original type.......................................................258
Machine location..................................................43 Output tray......................................................36, 37
Maintenance page.....................................291, 351 Output tray for the ADF.........................................37
Manual 2 sided scan mode...............................258 Output tray for the ARDF......................................36
Manual duplex copying.....................................169 Outside line access number..................................78
Manual duplex printing......................................145
P
Manual IP address..........................................71, 74
Page counter........................................................314
Manuals..............................................12, 21, 22, 23
Paper capacity.......................................................84
Max. e-mail size..................................................264
Paper feed roller.................................................416
mDNS setting.......................................................332
Paper Feed Unit TK1080.............................81, 457
Memory reception......................................244, 246
Paper jam..........................365, 368, 370, 375, 379
Memory transmission..........................................209
Paper mismatch..........................................136, 137
Menu chart..........................................................253
Paper recommendations.....................................117
Menu screen........................................................251
Paper registration................................................279
Missing image area............................................118
Paper settings.......................................................318
Model types...........................................................18
Paper size....................................84, 113, 114, 115
Model-specific information...................................18
Paper storage........................................................94
Moving........................................................420, 421
Paper tray............................................................313
Multi-access...........................................................61
Paper type...............................84, 86, 93, 113, 114
Paper weight..........................................................84
N
Names and functions............................................36 Pause time............................................................268
Names of major items...........................................15 Pause/Redial key.........................................39, 185
Network application...........................................332 PBX.............................................................67, 77, 78
Network connection.......................................24, 66 PBX access number.............................................298
467
PCL menu.............................................................304 Region B model.....................................................18
Plain paper.............................................................86 Report print settings.............................................270
POP3 settings.......................................................338 Reports.........................................................291, 351
Power cord.............................................................55 Reset settings...............................................298, 354
Power failure report............................................250 Resolution..................................193, 223, 264, 268
Power indicator......................................................39 Restore settings....................................................356
Power off................................................................55 Restrict user function.........125, 127, 128, 129, 329
Power on................................................................55
S
Power socket..........................................................38
SA (Security Association)...................................434
Power switch....................................................38, 55
Save scn data to USB.........................................298
Preprinted paper...................................................86
Scan destinations..............175, 181, 185, 186, 327
Prepunched paper.................................................86
Scan settings.......................................170, 191, 222
Print cartridge.......................................39, 409, 430
Scan size.....................................................191, 264
Print counter.........................................................314
Scan to E-mail......................................31, 175, 183
Print fax header...................................................268
Scan to Folder......................................32, 175, 183
Print functions.......................................................147
Scan to FTP...........................................31, 175, 183
Print output functions...........................................148
Scan to USB..................................................33, 188
Print quality functions..........................................147
Scan warm-up time.............................................279
Printable area........................................................94
Scanner carriage................................................279
Printer feature settings.........................................304
Scanner destination list..............................291, 351
Printer function......................................24, 136, 451
Scanner function...........................................29, 452
Printer properties.................................................134
Scanner journal..................................291, 297, 351
Printing position...................................................387
Scanner key............................................39, 59, 173
Priority tray...........................................................323
Scanner mode.....................................................173
Program fax information.....................................298
Scanner send setting...........................................332
PS menu...............................................................304
Scanner settings...................................................263
PSTN................................................................67, 77
Scanning from a computer.................................195
PSTN/PBX...........................................................298
Scanning mode...................................................264
Scanning using the control panel.......................183
Q
Quick Dial.......203, 204, 205, 206, 208, 214, 277 Screen....................................................................39
Quick Dial Dest...................................................277 Scroll keys..............................................................39
Quick Dial destination list..........................291, 351 Search conditions................................................341
Search options.....................................................341
R
Select paper................................................258, 320
Rear cover..............................................................38
Select paper tray........................................270, 320
Reception mode..................................................240
Selection key..........................................................39
Reception settings................................................270
Set date................................................................357
Recycled paper.....................................................86
Set date/time......................................................298
Redial...................................................................219
Set time.................................................................357
Reduce/Enlarge..................................................258
Shift key..................................................................39
Reduce/Enlarge key....................................39, 156
Shortcut to Func. key....................................39, 325
Reduced copy...............................................26, 156
Shortcut to function.....................................298, 325
Region A model.....................................................18
SMTP settings.......................................................337
468
SNMP settings.....................................................335
Sort.................................................................29, 258
Sound volume adjustment...................................317
Special sender list...............................................291
Special senders..........................................248, 328
Specifications....................449, 451, 452, 454, 455
Speed Dial.......203, 204, 205, 206, 208, 215, 277
Start key.................................................................39
Status information................................................313
Status messages..................................................399
Stop fences......................................................36, 37
Subnet mask........................................................287
Supplies status.....................................................279
Symbols..................................................................15
System.........................................................304, 335
System auto reset timer.......................................298
System information..............................................313
System settings............................................279, 317
U
Unpacking..............................................................46
USB connection...............................................24, 66
USB flash disk port..........................................36, 37
USB port..........................................................38, 66
User code............................................................129
User Tools key.......................................................39
W
Web Image Monitor...........................................309
WIA scanning...............................................30, 195
T
TCP/IP status.......................................................330
Telephone line.................................................67, 76
Telephone network.........................................67, 76
Thick paper 1.........................................................86
Thick paper 2.........................................................86
Thin paper..............................................................86
Time setting.........................................201, 298, 357
Toner....................................................................409
Toner saving................................................279, 324
Top page.............................................................311
Trademarks..........................................................463
Transmission mode..............................................209
Trap......................................................................335
Tray 1........................................................36, 37, 96
Tray 1 rear cover...................................................38
Tray 2...............................................36, 37, 81, 105
Tray paper settings..............................................279
Troubleshooting......362, 363, 384, 385, 386, 387,
TWAIN scanning..........................................30, 195
TX/RX standby file list................................291, 296
Type 1 model.........................................................18
Type 2 model.........................................................18
469
MEMO
470
MEMO
471
MEMO
GB
US
472
EN
EN
M119-8501
GB
US
EN
EN
M119-8501
© 2011
|